Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

the parameter is one of association or connection. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and click Open. the door retains this relationship to the partition. review the Revit Architecture templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.rte. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and customize the project as necessary. and phases when you need it.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. If the length of the elevation is changed. schedules. the operation of the software is parametric. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and plans. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. In this case. 2D and 3D view. the floor or roof remains connected. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. quantities. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You learn the terminology. and open Metric\Templates. you will use the default template. drawings. construction. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. how to navigate the user interface. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. scope. In the Revit Architecture model. If you move the partition. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and residential. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case. every drawing sheet. the hierarchy of elements. and schedules required for a building project. 13 Click OK. hence. For most tutorial projects. 12 Select DefaultMetric. click Training Files. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. sections. drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. As you work in drawing and schedule views.

■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. tags. tags. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and roofs are model elements. doors. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They display in relevant views of the model. For example. walls. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. doors. For example. dimensions. walls and roofs are hosts. windows. grids. If you can draw. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. Understanding the Basics | 7 . For example. and cabinets are model components. dimensions. programming is not required. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components. windows. filled regions. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.When you change something. and reference planes are datum elements. levels. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They help to describe or document the model. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects.

you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. or bottom of foundation. and ceilings. The project file contains all information for the building design. However. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model. views of the project. Project: In Revit Architecture. schedules. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. first floor. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. elevation views. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. families. you can explicitly control them. To place levels. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. and types. top of wall. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Often. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. section views. floors. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. By using a single project file. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. for example. such as roofs. and so forth). Most often. In other cases. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.In Revit Architecture. you must be in a section or elevation view. and drawings of the design.

A type can also be a style. categories of model elements include walls and beams. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. System families can be transferred between projects. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A type can be a specific size of a family. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. and levels. floors. dimensions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example. In the following illustration.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. specifically its clear user interface. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. identical use. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. the user interface is labeled. and similar graphical representation. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. In the steps that follow. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. System families include walls. However. roofs. For example. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. ceilings. making it easy to understand what each button represents.

click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. This creates a new project based on the default template. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. By default.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition.

The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Edit. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example. which are listed on the menu. While working in the drawing area. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. On the left side of the Options Bar. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. When you select the Door tool.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. when you add a door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example. 9 In the Type Selector.

You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Show Design Bars dialog displays. In the drawing area. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function.

click the tab in the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. select Views (all). The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. In the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. double-click its name. The browser is dockable. and groups. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. family category (doors. schedules. and rename views. walls. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . elevations. sheets. families. reports. delete. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and group name. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. windows). 3D). making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. To open a view.

After creating a browser organization scheme. In the bottom left corner of the window. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Do not click. click Cancel. In this case. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor displays as a pencil. click Wall.

regarding selected elements in a view. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. If no Help button displays. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. 20 Press TAB. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. click Modify to end the Wall command. press F1 for context-sensitive help. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons.18 On the Design Bar. press F1 for help. Windows: From any window. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. The status bar also provides information. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. You can use this tri-pane. It highlights when the cursor is over it. In addition. find a keyword on the Index tab. In the status bar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Click the Help button. After you are familiar with these tasks. in conjunction with tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). There are several tools that help you find information. click on the Standard toolbar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Tooltips: To see tooltips. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. When you place the cursor over an element. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5.

For example. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the drawing area. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files. the view zooms out from the building model. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 5 On the View toolbar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

on the View toolbar. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 7 Click in the drawing area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. When you release the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. As you move the mouse. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. . To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and double-click 2nd Flr. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and select the wall. called drag controls. For more information about SteeringWheels.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 17 Type ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 15 To exit the wheel. These are the drag controls. and click the SteeringWheels tab. press ESC. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. moving the wheel to the desired location. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Cnst. Small blue dots. and click Help. expand Views (all). click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying a building model. and then using the Zoom tool again. click Settings menu ➤ Options. as shown.

and on the Tools toolbar. and click again to specify the ending position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. In this case. for example. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.18 Click and drag the left control. Some commands. click (Move). 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. The table moves down. to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. as shown. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.

In this example. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Move. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and drag it on top of the table. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click Lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. or press CTRL+Z. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. such as the Lines command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. select the second item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the Undo command. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. 26 On the Undo menu. 24 Select the plant. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. click Modify. On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

illustrating how building components work together. Use detail components to define an assembly. this tutorial uses imperial units only. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. In this tutorial. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In Revit Architecture. and annotate building assemblies. but for training purposes.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. or referenced as a drafting view. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. When you have finished these tutorials. detail. 27 . you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools.

If necessary. and click OK.rvt. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Scale list. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll until the folder is displayed. click Training Files. enter Window Head Detail. for Name.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and reference a drafting view. click Drafting View. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. import a DWG detail. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. create a reference callout. you will create a drafting view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

located directly to the left of the drawing area.dwg. 6 In the Colors field list. displaying the extents of the detail. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. as shown.In the Project Browser. and click Open. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. select Black and White. The model zooms out. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . 9 Type ZR. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 10 In the drawing area. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. The drawing area is still blank. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.). the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

12 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Reference other view. to activate the view selection list. click Callout. 14 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. and in the Scale list.The view displays to the specified area. select Detail View: Detail. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . you will create a detail view defined by a callout. 3 In the drawing area. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select Callout. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. double-click the reference callout tag head. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. select Detail View: Detail. c_express_workshop_details_start. and in the Scale list. in the Type Selector. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. 2 On the Options Bar. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The reference callout is created. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.

7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. and click OK.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views(Detail). and click Rename. 6 In the drawing area. for Name. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Wall Base 1. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify to clear the selection. 4 Right-click Detail 0. under Detail Views (Detail). enter Wall Base 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog.

This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.

The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. click (Hide Crop Region). select As Underlay. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 Click OK. under Graphics. and click View Properties. 14 In the drawing area. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Display Model.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 13 On the View Control Bar. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. right-click.

the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. 17 On the View Control Bar. on the Options Bar. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. click Detail Components.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. If the crop region is enlarged. and press ENTER. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. typical details can easily be placed. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. type 1' 6''. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. 19 In the Type Selector. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. Stud. Directly above the drawing area.Brick on Mtl. By grouping detail components. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior .

23 Using the same method. and click Create Instance. click Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. as shown. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. expand Groups ➤ Detail. add the following detail components as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 25 In the Project Browser.

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.

In the next exercise. special notes. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and format keynote styles. Leader.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and under Keynote Table. and verify that Horizontal. or instructions within a construction documentation package. c_express_workshop_details_start. For more information about customizing a keynote database. 4 On the Options Bar. for Full Path. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and Free End are selected. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. You can customize this list. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . map keynotes by material. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. click Training Files. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.txt. click Keynote ➤ Element. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. in the type selector.rvt. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

or increase the size of the annotation crop region.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 8 Click to place the tag. Either move the text inside. If no value has been specified. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. Keynoting | 39 .5 In the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. a question mark displays.

You will now change all keynotes to keys only.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. 13 Click to place the tag. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Click to place the leader arm. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 16 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Material. and click OK. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.

Click Check None. Select Keynote Tags.All items within the selection display in red. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Click OK. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. legends. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents.Boxed. 19 In the Type Selector. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 17 On the Options Bar. Only the keynotes remain selected.

42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . this tutorial uses imperial units only. Place views on drawing sheets. update the project information element properties. and modify and update the project sheet title block. In this exercise. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. In this lesson. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Add labels to a title block. you will create a sheet. but for training purposes.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions.

If necessary. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. or in the element properties of the title block. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click Training Files. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. Project Sheet Layout | 43 .rvt. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. In the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture. 3 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. hold down the wheel and drag. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter Sections/Details. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 9 In the Project Browser. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. To zoom in and out. For Name. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. under Sheets(all). 5 In the drawing area.Unnamed. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Smith and press ENTER. Click OK. and click Rename. double-click Checker. enter A602. click Modify to clear the selection. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Then. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. roll the wheel. 7 Enter K. In this tutorial. right-click A602 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. To pan. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area.4 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Title Block.

displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. enter 4/10/2008. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter J. (Left) is selected. For Project Name. Smith.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Client Name. enter Design Development. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 16 Type ZR. in the Type Selector. 15 In the Options Bar. For Project Status. select Text : 1/8''. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 13 Click OK. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. select the title block. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 Click and type Project Status. enter Freighthouse Flats. The Family Editor opens. 18 On the Options Bar. click Text.

click Modify to exit the command. and verify that (Top) are selected. click Label. 22 Using the same method. as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. under Category Parameters. in the Type Selector. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. add Project Issue Date parameter. click (Load into Project). 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Label : 3/16''.21 On the Design Bar. as shown. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. to add 28 Using the same method. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and click. and click OK. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar.

4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog.Project. select Override parameter values of existing types. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.txt. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. to a drawing sheet.30 In the Reload Family dialog. click Training Files. place and modify a keynote legend. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. enter Keynote Legend . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . Next you will create. for Full Path. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. representing the view or schedule. a viewport displays. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. and under Keynote Table. for Name. In this exercise. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. click Browse. and click Yes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and drag Keynote Legend . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. as shown. double-click A601 .Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. and click OK. under Text.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Sheets (all).Sections/Details. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . on the Appearance tab. clear Show Headers.

13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.9 Press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown.

enter Keynote Legend . and click OK. not keynotes. under Legends. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and click OK.Sheet. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 15 In the Project Browser.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Properties. 19 Click OK twice. as shown. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. right-click Keynote Legend . at the bottom of the Filter tab. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. click Edit. expand Detail Views (Detail). NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. for Filter. The Keynote Legend is now blank. for View Name. select Filter by sheet.Project. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The view remains selected. double-click A0 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 .The keynote legend is automatically updated.Title Sheet 1. under Sheets (all). 2 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view title with line displays below the viewport. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.

and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The drawing list remains selected. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. and zoom in on the drawing list. As part of a construction document set. expand Schedules/Quantities. 6 Type ZR.When you place a view on a sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. or omit view titles from sheets. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 3 In the Type Selector. define the information to include in a view title. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. You can specify text attributes for view titles. by default. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. Press ESC to clear the selection.

Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. right-click the selected sheets. The drawing list display is updated. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. clear Appears In Drawing List. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. while pressing SHIFT. under Sheets (all). and click Properties. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser.Ceiling Plans. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. select A602 . under Identity Data.Sections/Details and select A801 . including only sheets that contain views.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

or “flex the model” by changing parameters. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. a central service core. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. the wall or column will move with it. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. 57 . Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. it is good practice to test the constraints. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. a curtain wall.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. For example. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. As you develop the building design. If the grid moves. After the beginning exercises. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other.

subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. and settings. In the drawing area in the right pane. 3 Under Template file. South. Creating the Project In this exercise. In practice. 5 Click OK. you load any required family type that is not in your project. you design inside the elevation markers. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. from the product library. such as a door or window. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. with an RVT extension. views. The project is stored as a single file. click New. West. and residential. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. but contains no geometry. and customize the project as necessary. For this project. under Projects. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. East. 2 In the New Project dialog. you use a template that is provided with the software. In views that display elevation markers. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. The new project opens. levels. select Project. click Training Files.rte. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Create new. To create the project file. verify that the second option is selected. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. notice four elevation markers. construction. you will use the default template. and click Browse. locate the Project Browser.

13 In the file window. the view you see in the drawing area. created by the template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. delete. will be accessible from the Project Browser. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. content and building model reports. 7 If necessary. and on the General tab. Creating the Project | 59 . Families. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Schedules/Quantities.rvt) is selected. Ceiling Plans. 16 Click Save. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and other properties. double-click Metric. display in the south elevation. schedules. change their properties. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and duplicate levels. double-click South. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 14 For File name. You can add.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 Under Floor Plans. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. verify that Project Files (*. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. expand Views (all). Two level lines. and click Training Files. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). and Elevations (Building Elevation). and elevation views created in the project by the template.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. sheets. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). then expand Floor Plans. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and delete them. These views are customizable: you can rename them. Sheets (all). you will want to save your work frequently. as well as change their names. reflected ceiling plan views. Groups. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 15 For Save as type. and families in your project. heights. such as schedules and legends. As you design and document your building model. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. enter Revit Retail Building. notice the Legends. view the Save reminder interval. duplicate them. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1.

as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. and press ENTER. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so that when one level moves. When you begin designing. After you modify the two default levels. and double-click South. You change the names of the 2 default levels. You learn how the levels are locked. doors. or constrained. to each other. and windows within the building model. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. expand Views (all). TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. Adding Project Levels on page 60. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. the other levels move and change with it.17 Proceed to the next exercise.

The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. By default. which should display by default. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. not all the tabs are visible. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. As you move the cursor.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 0. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. Adding Project Levels | 61 .) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. and press ESC. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. enter -1800. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. click Level. and click OK. view the Design Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and then move it up. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 14 Click Plan View Types. right-click. This is the Options Bar. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. Next. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 16 Enter 3750. and press ENTER. and click Basics. and press ENTER. enter 01 Entry Level. When you add the new level. and press ENTER. If it does not.

20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. you add another level. enter 3750. click Rename. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. right-click Level 3. or on the Design Bar. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. If you create a level by copying it. click (Pick Lines). Next. click Level. under Floor Plans. and rename the corresponding views. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. and move it slightly upward. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. using a different option. 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. and for Offset.18 In the Project Browser. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. and enter 02 Level. 26 Press ESC. 19 Click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Click to place the level line.

and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. all the levels move. If you select a level and click its lock. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. the levels are no longer constrained. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Notice that by moving the top level. Adding Project Levels | 63 . as shown. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only.

click Modify. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. double-click 00 Foundation. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. On the Design Bar. so that if the roof elevation changes. In the following exercise. Move the cursor up. When the grid is complete. under Floor Plans. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. In a later exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. and specify the grid line endpoint. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Grid. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. the column height changes as well. select (Draw). until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. specify a start point for the grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Enter A. Click to place the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. click Grid. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. click (Pick Lines). enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. and press ENTER. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. and for Offset. for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. enter 4500 mm. and click to place the line. Next. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. for Offset.

12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid.8 Press ESC. 11 On the Design Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . On the Options Bar.

Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select grid lines C and 3. click Dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 22 While pressing CTRL. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 15 Starting with grid line A. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 21 Press ESC twice. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Aligned).

At the left endpoint of the grid line. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and select grid line A. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click the value for Center Segment. click and drag the blue circular grip up. and on the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Modify. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. until it is closer to grid line A.5mm Bubble with Gap. enter 50mm. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 24 Press ESC. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. The pins are hidden. click . select grid line 5. and select None. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click Modify. until it is closer to grid line 5. and click OK. By pinning these central grid lines. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 31 For End Segments Length. 32 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. If necessary. 26 In the drawing area. and press ESC. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and press ESC. 29 In the Name dialog. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. enter 6. click Duplicate. Two pins display on the grid lines. (Element Properties).

click Finish. select Grid : 6. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. For Place By.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Structural Column. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Modify. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. and in the Type Selector. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. and press ESC. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines. 39 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Selector. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.5mm Bubble. click (Grid Intersection). 37 Select the grid lines again. 36 On the Design Bar. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). and on the Options Bar.

47 Enter 9000. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 45 While pressing CTRL. Next. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 52 On the Options Bar. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Press ESC. click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and unlock it. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. lock it. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. select grid line A. for From. 46 On the Options Bar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. If it is unlocked. and press ENTER. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. select 01 Entry Level.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera.

You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. under Views (all). named 3D View 1 by default. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Adding Beams In this exercise. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. In the Rename View dialog. When you finish adding beams. The current view. Right-click 3D View 1. displays in bold under 3D Views. and click Rename. and then copy them to subsequent levels. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. enter To Building. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. Adding Beams on page 72. expand 3D Views.

The selected grid lines display as red. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 4 Click Medium. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . under Floor Plans. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Beam. click Finish. the icon on the right side of the scale. The view is currently set to Coarse. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. double-click 01 Entry Level. 6 In the Type Selector. 8 While pressing CTRL. view the icons on the View Control Bar.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click (Create Beam On Grid). 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. select each grid line. Adding Beams | 73 . under 3D Views.

press and hold SHIFT. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View toolbar. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 06 Roof. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. double-click 01 Entry Level. right-click. 14 Select one of the beams. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. select 02 Level. 17 In the Select Levels dialog.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. and click OK. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. click (Default 3D View).

but it would only change the height of the single selected column. for Top Level. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 25 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. and if necessary. When you created the columns. and click Select All Instances. 21 With the column selected. under 3D Views. and click Element Properties. 20 Click Cancel. and click OK. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. under Instance Parameters. (Element Properties). select 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click 24 Press ESC. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.to the 5th level. All of the columns display as red. right-click. Adding Beams | 75 . The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 06 Roof. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. view the Top Level parameter. double-click To Building. right-click.

NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as lines only. under Elevations. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. double-click South. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. but you want to display them in less detail. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 28 Save the drawing.

Adding Braces on page 77. To better add the braces to the structure. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces In this exercise. and press ESC to end the command. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces | 77 . 3 On the Options Bar.

and when the endpoint snap displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 11 Using the same technique. click Brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. click to specify the start point of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 8 In the Type Selector. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 7 On the Design Bar. The associated framing elevation view displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. After you add the final brace. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click the elevation marker arrow. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. but when placed the braces are placed. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. press ESC twice. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary).

Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. The height of the roof lowers.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER. Adding Braces | 79 .

14 On the Standard toolbar. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .13 Double-click the 04 Level height. enter 10000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. under Floor Plans. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER. but this time add them from right to left. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.

23 In the Project Browser. 21 Select grid line A. and press ENTER. Adding Braces | 81 . NOTE As you add braces. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. click Activate Dimensions. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. as shown in the 3D view below. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. enter 12000 mm. and click the lock that displays to unlock it.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views.

you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. beams. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 31 Save the drawing. and if necessary. click and roof height. double-click {3D}. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. grid size. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 29 In the Project Browser. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. Test connectivity of the columns. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 26 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation on page 82. and drag it away from the structure. under Elevations.24 In the Project Browser. double-click South. lock it. under 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm.

The foundation pile cap now displays. under View Depth. and click View Properties. select Unlimited. and press ESC twice. After you load the pile cap family. A warning displays. The pile cap has been added in the view. double-click 00 Foundation. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Creating a Foundation | 83 . and drag it to the drawing area. for Level. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Training Files. 9 Close the warning dialog. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. In the View Range dialog. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). and expand Structural Foundations. Click OK twice. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and how to load specific families into a project. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click Edit. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. expand Families. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser.Before you can add the pile caps. for View Range. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm.

13 In the Project Browser. press ESC twice. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap.

under 3D Views. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.rvt. you change the types of the columns. and click Select All Instances.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and braces that you used to create the building structure. beams. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. and brace families into the project. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. right-click. click Training Files. 2 Select one of the columns. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. beam. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . You load new column. All columns in the building model display as red. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. It is not available in a perspective or camera view.

click (Element Properties). 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 7 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar.5CHS. right-click. you change the brace type. but it is the only size of its type currently available. click Modify. The building model displays the round hollow columns. for Type.9. 16 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Select All Instances. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 4 On the Design Bar. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 17 While pressing CTRL. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. In the following steps. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. the braces as well as the beams change. under Dimensions. 13 In the Name dialog. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Type Selector. for d. and click OK. 6 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View). enter 75mm. click Brace. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. and changing its size parameter. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. enter 75mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Elevation 1-a. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. The brace type changes. click Modify. This not the size that you want to use. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type.2X101. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar.6X15.

Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. select m_RRB_structure_complete.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Auto . and click Open. Linking the Structural Model | 87 .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After the files are linked. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.Origin to Origin. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.rvt. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. 3 Under Positioning.

After the link is established. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. however. depending on the project. structural members. In this case. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Copy/Monitor). 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. select Multiple. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. double-click South. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. Grids. 6 In the drawing area. while pressing CTRL. 9 In the drawing area. select Levels 00 through 06. and walls could also be copy/monitored. select the linked Revit model. click Copy. and click Select Link.4 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Tools toolbar.

Linking the Structural Model | 89 . click Finish. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. while pressing SHIFT. for Floor Plan views. under Floor Plans. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view.10 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1. 13 On the Design Bar. click OK. First. 16 Click OK. delete the Level 2 floor plan. 18 Using the same method. 15 In the New Plan dialog. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. and click Delete. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). click Finish mode. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display.

21 In the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level.19 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plans. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. and click OK. 25 In the View Templates dialog. for Name. right-click. under Floor Plans. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. click OK. 20 In the drawing area. select the Topography : Surface. right-click. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 24 In the New View Template dialog. double-click 00 Foundation.

select Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. click Camera. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . double-click Site.

such as roofs. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.35 In the Project Browser. stairs. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 36 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1.rvt. Adding Floors In this exercise. In this exercise. Some other Revit Architecture elements. enter To Building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. To create floors. and railings are also created from sketches. expand 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Floors on page 92. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.

Move the cursor to the left.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. You are now in the Sketch Editor. click Lines. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor. If the grid changes size. On the Options Bar. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Do not lock the dimension. Leave this dimension unlocked. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 93 . At the top left corner of the grid. and elements in the current view display as gray. and then the first horizontal grid line. select the top floor line. double-click 01 Entry Level. past the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps.

■ 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Move the cursor to the left dimension. select the top floor line. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. and click the temporary dimension value. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Do not lock the dimensions.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. At the top left corner of the grid. and then press ESC. press ENTER. They display on the floor sketch. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Enter 300. Select and lock the dimensions.

Adding Floors | 95 . and on the Options Bar. click Quit Sketch. click Edit. Select the three remaining floor lines. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.8 Select the floor. and press ESC. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. double-click 02 Level. On the Options Bar. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Floor. click (Pick Lines). and lock the dimensions. on the Design Bar. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and for Offset. enter 1500mm. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. using a different sketching technique. Next. On the Sketch tab. click Lines.

click Floor. The 02 Level floor displays. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Lines. 17 On the Sketch tab. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. and a lock icon displays. click (Rectangle). Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 On the Design Bar. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click (Align).13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 18 On the Options Bar. double-click 03 Level. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 14 On the Design Bar. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

double-click {3D}. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. select 05 Roof Garden. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Finish Sketch. Alternatively. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. under Floor Plans. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click OK. and lock the edges. click Finish Sketch. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Edit. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 32 Select the floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 97 . you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 33 At the top left corner of the grid.24 On the Design Bar.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof on page 98. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Adding a Roof In this exercise. click Training Files. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click Lines. ■ ■ For Offset. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. When a blue dashed line displays. enter 1800 mm. under Floor Plans. To create the roof. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. click to place the roof line. double-click 06 Roof. Click (Pick Lines). 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.

8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). for Offset.6 Select grid line 5. Adding a Roof | 99 . click to place the roof line. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 300 mm. and when the blue dashed line displays. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.10 Press ESC. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. click (Trim/Extend). select the roof. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). click Finish Roof.

click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 . and press ENTER. on grid D. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 15 On the Options Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. and click to specify the section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof.14 On the Options Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. click Section. for Elevation. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. enter -100 mm.

In section. under Floor Plans. click Edit. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. double-click 06 Roof. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.20 On the Design Bar. for Structure [1]. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. (Element Properties). Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. select Variable. for Structure. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the roof. under Construction. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser.

In this case. on the View Control Bar. moving counter-clockwise. 38 In the 3D view. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. and press DELETE. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click OK. 37 If necessary. select the section line.31 On the Design Bar. select each edge. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 40 In the Type Selector. select Fascia : Fascia . Adding a Roof | 103 . Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. click (Default 3D View). zoom in to the roof. click Modify. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 33 In the warning dialog. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Roof Edge.

You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. click Modify. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. you add a curtain wall. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. the curtain wall resizes with it. so if you resize the grid.42 On the Design Bar.

click Duplicate. under Floor Plans. For Height. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click Edit/New. and move it slightly toward the building interior. for Join Condition. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . Under Construction. enter 600 mm. enter 2100 mm. click Training Files. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. When you duplicate a type. for Type. click 01 Entry Level. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Wall. The type is saved in the project. enter 1050 mm. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. For Offset. Under Vertical Grid Pattern.rvt. enter Retail Storefront. For Level. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. for Spacing. 6 In the Name dialog. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. Click OK twice. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. select 01 Entry Level. select 05 Roof Garden. click to place the first curtain wall segment. for Spacing.

the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. These dimensions are not in a sketch. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. and trim each curtain wall segment. double-click To Building. you can delete the dimensions. click (Trim/Extend). View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. If you want to hide them. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and lock the dimensions. click Dimension. so they remain in the view.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. If the grid moves.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance on page 107. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating an Entrance | 107 .rvt. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

To better work with the curtain wall panels. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 6 Under Visibility. as these usually represent internal pilasters. under Views (all). and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab. click All. under the element list.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. clear one element to clear all the elements. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click None. 5 Under Visibility. 7 Click OK. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Do not select Columns. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . All the elements in the list are selected. in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

press and hold CTRL. 18 On the View Control Bar. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 12 With the panels selected. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and click OK. in this case an architectural elevation. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under 3D Views. 10 Select 1 panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. in the Type Selector. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. select Architectural Elevation. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. Creating an Entrance | 109 . double-click {3D}. select System Panel : Solid.

double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click To Building. under 3D Views.

click Curtain Grid. and unpin it. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and click to select it. click Modify. 32 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 111 . select another mullion to the right. select One Segment. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.

and view the new entrance. select it. click (Default 3D View). 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. 34 On the View toolbar.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3rd. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 39 Using the same process. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . remove the mullions from the 2nd. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels. 40 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.38 Press DELETE.

3 Right-click in the view. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and click View Properties. under Graphics. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. 5 Click OK. for Underlay.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 02 Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. under Floor Plans.

enter Display Area. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . and click Rename. under Floor Plans. select the grip closest to the callout head. 9 In the Project Browser. click Callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and click to complete the callout. 8 Select the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 10 In the Rename View dialog. which indicates you must draw the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown.

14 Press ESC. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 16 Select the section box. as shown. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. and click Flip Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. 13 Select the section line. click Section. 12 Draw a section line.

and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. select Basic Wall : Interior . click Wall. Click (Rectangle). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 18 In the Rename View dialog. click (Align). 21 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Prefer.17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Wall faces. 25 Press ESC twice.135mm Partition (2-hr). 26 On the Design Bar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. For Loc Line. expand Sections (Building Section). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click Rename. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior. click Dimension. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. right-click Section 1. Lock both alignments. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. enter Section Display Area. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar.

Next. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 32 In the Type Selector. 38 On the View Control Bar.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. under Ceiling Plans. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. double-click Section Display Area. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimension. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Sections (Building Section). 37 In the Project Browser. click Ceiling.) 36 Press ESC twice. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser.

40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. On the Options Bar. enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. for Height Offset From Level. enter 2700 mm. 46 Press ESC. click Modify. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click to select the walls. and press ESC. and click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. click (Element Properties). under Sections. 41 On the Options Bar. click Attach. under Constraints. 43 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB until you select the wall chain. for Base Offset. click to select it. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Ceiling Plans. and click to select the walls. and click OK. and click OK. under Constraints.

view the ceiling structure. for Structure. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. under Ceiling Plans. 52 In the Type Properties dialog.49 In the Project Browser. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Cancel. click (Rotate). 56 In the Element Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. and click . click Cancel. 54 Click OK. under Construction. for Type. 51 In the Element Properties dialog.

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. enter 45. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . and press ENTER.60 Click.

64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. click Shadows Off. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 66 Optionally.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. enter 1500 mm. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click to create a reference plane to the right. and for Offset. click Ref Plane. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and copy it to the 05 Level. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Move the cursor over grid line B. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. and click to create a reference plane to the left. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 .rvt. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise.

Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. C. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify a point to create first stair flight. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. and 3. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 7 Using the same method. 2. 6 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. shorten the right reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Stairs.

10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Finish Face: Interior.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). select Basic Wall : Generic . ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. Move the cursor down. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. including its handrails.225mm Masonry. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. The complete stair displays. beyond the end of the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. and specify a point. click Wall. and select the 2nd reference plane. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to select it. 18 Using the same technique. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and lock the alignment. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Lock the dimension. for Prefer. Select the interior face of the wall. and specify a point away from the wall. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. and press ENTER. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Align. select the dimension value. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. select Wall faces.15 On the Tools toolbar. Select the wall. Click Modify. enter 1200 mm.

25 While pressing CTRL. and press DELETE. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Because the dimension is constrained. a warning displays. click Door. 27 In the Type Selector. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. and press DELETE. TIP To flip the door swing. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door.21 Select the dimension. 28 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar. 23 Select the stair. The stair and walls move to the left. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . (Undo). select both reference planes.

Click OK. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. (Default 3D View). click Align. for Base Constraint. select 05 Roof Garden. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. but if you view the top level of the building.30 On the Design Bar. (Rectangle). 35 On the View toolbar. select all 4 walls. for Multistory Top Level. For Top Constraint. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 44 On the Tools toolbar. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. and move the cursor to spin the building model. (Element Properties). (SteeringWheels). 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. select 00 Foundation. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click 36 On the View toolbar. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. Under Constraints. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. Click OK. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). double-click 01 Entry Level. click Modify. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 33 Select the stair.

52 In the Select Levels dialog. on the View toolbar.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignment. and click OK. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. (SteeringWheels). Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click see the roof. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and lock the alignments. click (Default 3D View). and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary.

The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. under Floor Plans. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Up to Level: 06 Roof. (Default 3D View). Under Constraints. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. and click OK. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. 56 Select the shaft. enter 300 mm.55 In the Project Browser. click 59 On the View toolbar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). By offsetting the base. For Top Constraint. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. (SteeringWheels). 62 Proceed to the next exercise. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. for Base Offset. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. double-click 01 Entry Level. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.

4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Underlay. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. and click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 2 Right-click in the view. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . under Graphics. click Training Files. and click View Properties. select 06 Roof.

click . 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.225mm Masonry. select Basic Wall : Generic . The exact placement is not important. click Remove Constraints. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Go To View dialog. click Edit Profile. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click (Fillet arc). click (Align). 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 15 In the error dialog. and then select the right face of the wall. select Elevation: South. and press ENTER. click Lines. enter 9750. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. and click Open View.

as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 22 In the Project Browser. and click (Circle). 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. click . as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

click Component. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. select Planter : 1220 x 1220.rvt. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . select M_RPC Tree .Deciduous : Japanese Cherry .5 Meters. 5 On the Basics tab. and press ESC twice. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. as shown. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 3 In the Type Selector. TIP After you place the 1st planter. between grid lines C and D. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.4. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.

The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. For Offset. and click OK. (Element Properties). click Edit/New. click Floor. double-click {3D}. select the 2 remaining trees.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. and in the Type Selector. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 Select one of the trees. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. for Height. and then click OK twice. 17 While pressing CTRL. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. enter 1500 mm.8 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. enter Japanese Cherry 1. View the roof.5 Meters. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click Apply. select M_RPC Tree . and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. as shown. for Type. 21 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. click (Default 3D View).5 Meters. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Duplicate. 14 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 2400 mm. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Project Browser.

and click to place the line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. click (Draw). 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . for Offset. 25 Using the same method. 29 On the Options Bar. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line.

clear Chain. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. click (Trim/Extend). 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 32 Press ESC.30 On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line.

click Duplicate. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees.38 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 48 In the Type Selector. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. When you render an image. In plan view. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 43 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. for Type. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . under Constraints. The completed sidewalk displays. near Column E5. and click so he is facing the column. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter Sidewalk. 45 Click OK. 42 In the Name dialog. enter -250 mm. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. select M_RPC Male : Alex. Next. select Rotate after placement. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. for Height Offset from Level. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. a photorealistic image displays. as shown: (Element Properties). click Component. 39 Select the sidewalk.

click Camera. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. about 30 degrees. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click (Element Properties). 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 54 In the Type Selector. 52 In the Type Selector. 56 Press ESC twice. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place her on the sidewalk. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. click the car. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If necessary.

both Cathy and Alex will move with it. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 65 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. 63 Click the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and on the Options Bar. If the sidewalk changes height. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. double-click West.59 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. When you select a host for a component. click Pick Host. enter -300 mm. under Elevations. Next. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. double-click To Building. for Offset. 66 Using the same method. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 64 Select Alex. click Pick Host. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 60 In the Project Browser.

you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. and replace them with a service core. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

2 Zoom in to the stairwell. walls. 5 On the View toolbar. including the stairs. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and shaft opening. click Training Files. double-click 05 Roof Garden.rvt. you delete the entire stairwell. click (Default 3D View). By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels). 4 Press DELETE. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click 6 On the View toolbar.

rvt. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and on the Design Bar. click Modify.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. double-click 00 Foundation. 14 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. expand Model. under Floor Plans. expand Groups. click Training Files. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the linked instance. click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. and notice that the linked file is listed. click (Align). 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click m_RRB_core. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar.

Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . (Default 3D View). and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click 21 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click Modify. 18 Select the core. ■ ■ Click grid line C. and on the Options Bar. and click to align the center. click Modify. click Ungroup. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 20 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 19 On the Design Bar. or if the group layout is expected to change. click (top down view).

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. After you modify it. where it is hosted within a railing family. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.

rvt. 3 In the Conference project. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. The rendering displays. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and open Metric\m_Conference. click (Split). click Edit. expand Renderings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and expand Railings. in the Project Browser. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and click to split the floor. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . Notice the glass railing in the foreground. and on the Options Bar. click OK. expand Families. double-click 02 Level. Handrail only. 5 Expand Railing. and select Glass. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and double-click Lounge Perspective.rvt. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press and hold CTRL. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and Parapet. 8 In the Project Browser. The floor sketch displays. under Floor Plans.

and click to draw another line. and click to draw another line. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. click (Align). and on the Options Bar. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 18 On the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. and click to place it. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. click Modify. verify that Chain is not selected. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 25 Select grid line B.

click Dimension. select Glass. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. click Railing. 30 On the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. and click OK. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 29 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment.rvt project. enter 100 mm. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 27 On the Tools toolbar.26 Select grid line D. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. for Type. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click Finish Sketch. click (Align). Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 31 In the Revit dialog. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Lock the dimensions. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

39 Click Finish Sketch. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera.37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. NOTE For training purposes. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. and a roof garden. 153 . balconies. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. lofty ceilings. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. slight modifications to the building design have been made. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. exterior fire stairs.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials.

154 .

you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. section.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. elevation. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. how to create section and elevation views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You learn how to create new views from existing views. 155 .

click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog.2 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 .

and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. 14 On the View Control Bar. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. double-click Vicinity Plan. enter Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser.

Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 .15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.

click Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans.

click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.

11 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor down. select 1:100. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Building Section. under Elevations. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). for Scale. under Views (all). enter South East. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. double-click South East.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click Section. and double-click Level 1. 15 On the Options Bar.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

and click to place it. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. Click the midpoint of the section line. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar.21 On the Design Bar. using the blue circular drag grip. 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view.

and click to specify a point to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select 1:50. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Creating Callout Views | 167 . 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. select Floor Plan.Resulting callout view . for Scale. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar.

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Select the middle grip. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. click Modify. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. click Modify.7 On the Design Bar. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Type Selector. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. for Scale. select Detail View: Detail. Creating Callout Views | 169 . click Callout. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. under Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 171 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. open Metric\Families\Annotations. the elevation markers.rvt. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Training Files.rfa. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom-Section Head. under Floor Plans. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Open. double-click Level 1. You change the appearance of the section mark head.

10 On the floor plan. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . scroll to Section Line. Section Tail . 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK twice. scroll to Section Marks.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. click Load into Project. Section Tail – Filled. click Edit/New. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and can be applied to the section line. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select 3. for Section Head. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK. On the floor plan. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. select the section line. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 4 On the Design Bar.Custom. and click OK. . and click OK. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.5mm Square. enter 12. 19 Click OK. enter Section Head – Custom. 15 Under Category. click Duplicate. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Under Category. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Section Head .Filled. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. clear any others. 8 In the Name dialog. and select 2.

for Callout Tag. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. . . select Square. On the floor plan. and click Open. click Training Files. and on the Options Bar. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. select 12. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.rfa. click Duplicate. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Elevation Tag. and click OK. 34 In the Name dialog.23 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. click Edit/New. select 3. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 12. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click OK. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and on the Options Bar. select the callout. clear all others.5mm Square. click Load into Project. For Dimensions ➤ Width. For Corner Radius. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. For Line Weight. 36 In the drawing. 39 Click OK twice. notice the square elevation markers that display. select Custom-Callout Head.5 mm. 40 Press ESC. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. enter 6 mm. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice.

filters. 49 Click OK. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 46 Under Category. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. and visual overrides. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 4. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll down to Callout Boundary. expand Callout Boundary. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . view regions. You learn to create view templates. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. select Dash. masking regions. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and select 7. 43 Under Category.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Training Files. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom to Fit. under Elevations. The crop region displays as red. click (Show Crop Region). you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and double-click East. 5 On the View Control Bar. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 6 On the View Toolbar.rvt. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating a View Template In this exercise. To accomplish this. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building.

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 11 Under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. Callouts. and section lines are now hidden in the view. grids. clear Entourage. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. levels. Creating a View Template | 177 . 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. elevation markers. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 20 Using the same method. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click East. 18 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. click Apply. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click OK. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK. edit the crop region as before. and click Create View Template From View. 16 In the View Templates dialog.14 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 17 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. right-click North. 15 In the New View Template dialog. under Elevations. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click Apply View Template.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. for Bottom. Click OK twice.rvt. under Extents. and click Properties. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. double-click Penthouse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. click Edit. for View Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. select Level Below (Level 4). select Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Level. right-click.

double-click Roof Plan. for Level. select Level 4. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. select Level 4. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. Under View Depth. Click OK twice.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Extents. right-click. for View Range.

click Edit. for Bottom. In the left corner of the building. click Region Properties. Move you cursor diagonally. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. for Level. 11 On the Options Bar. select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle).Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Under View Depth. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Lines. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. for View Range. click Finish Sketch. click Plan Region. 13 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Click OK twice.

18 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Views (all). the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. the fire rating of the walls. After you apply the filter. and double-click Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. in this case. click the Filters tab. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.rvt. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

click OK. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 In the Filters dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . select the red color. for Color. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click <No Override>. and click OK. under Filters. click Add. 17 Using the same method. under Basic colors. 11 Select Rated Walls. for Pattern. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Enter Hr. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. select Fire Rating. under Categories. Select contains. 16 Click OK. select Walls. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. click Edit/New. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click (New). 10 On the Filter tab. under Projection/Surface. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and apply a color. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Rated Walls. enter Rated Walls. 14 In the Color dialog. select Solid Fill. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. click Override under Patterns. click Remove.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. as shown. 8 Select the crop region. click Masking Region. click Show Crop Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 5 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar. select Invisible lines. 7 On the View menu. right-click. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Cut. right-click Unit 18 Plan . select Walls. under Visibility. right-click.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Level 1. click the current scale. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. right-click. and click OK. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. 4 On the View Control Bar. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Override. under Floor Plans. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click 1: 50. 11 Click OK twice.rvt. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click black. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . select Solid fill. click in the Patterns field. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. for Pattern. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

clear Grids. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Floors. and click OK. under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click <No Override> to apply a color.20 Right-click. click a purple color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. select Dash. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Lines. and click OK. 25 Click OK twice. for Color. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. By using the previous method to make the selection. 23 In the Color dialog. click Projection Lines. right-click. select the sofa.

28 For Color. click . click Modify. right-click. and click OK twice. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 32 Select one of the lamps. click By Category Override. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. select a bright green color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 30 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Color dialog.

you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. click .33 On the View Control Bar. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. right-click.Creating Sheets.rvt. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . click Sheet. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Training Files. select A0 metric. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click View.

5 When the title block highlights. enter Site Plan. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar.Unnamed.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Name. Click OK. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and select the title block. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter A101. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. For Sheet Number.

Smith. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Name. For Project Status. For Project Number. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter J. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. for Project Address. enter For Approval. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 15 May. 2009. enter 2009-1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Edit. For Client Name. The new project information displays in the titleblock. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 14 Click OK.

right-click. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A105 . for Name. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Rename. select the new sheet name. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Layout Plan A104 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Sections A108 . you add views to these sheets. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Save. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. enter Floor Plan.Elevations A107 .Stairs In the following exercise. and click OK. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. select A0 metric. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A106 .

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click to place the view. and click to place it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify.Floor Plan.Elevations. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . 2 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. double-click A104 .rvt. under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 . drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. under Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. 4 On the Design Bar. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Modify. and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). double-click A107 . and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Sections.

for View Scale. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. and press TAB until it highlights. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. move the cursor over it. . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. select 1:5.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. zoom in to the grip. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 16 Select title bar.

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 18 Under Floor Plans. click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Stairs. and click to place it. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click A108 . double-click Level 1. under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans.

2 Select the building section view.Sections.rvt. In order to do this. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. right-click. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. double-click A107 . you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. under Sheets (all). and press ENTER. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. enter 16700 mm.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. After you create the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. double-click North.6 Right-click. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You modify the view to hide the view title. and click Deactivate View.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. For Sheet Name. select the new sheet name. The camera view displays. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . enter T. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. select A0 metric. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. click Camera. enter Title Sheet. Click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click.

and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. For Target Elevation.Title Sheet. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Eye Elevation. Click OK. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. under Sheets (all). 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Camera. enter 1500 mm. enter 18000 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. double-click T . enter 100000 mm. Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Far Clip Offset.

on the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter Viewport/no title mark. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . enter 635 mm. and then click OK.15 With the view selected. 25 On the Design Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). . 22 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Under Model Crop Size. for Height. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 19 Select the view on the sheet. for Show title. click Size. Click Apply. select No.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Objects In this lesson. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Because of the open style floor plan. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as doors and windows. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Level 1. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as room and window schedules. 207 . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 .6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. 9 In the Tags dialog.

The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Room. click Modify. 11 In the Tags dialog. 14 For Offset. type 2400 mm.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and click to place the room and tag. click OK. indicating that it can be edited. and press ENTER. The room tag number displays in blue. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and select the room tag. 16 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 13 On the Options Bar. type U18-1. click it. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files. and the rectangle contains the room tag.

22 Click the room text label. click Modify. Dining. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and press ENTER. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. place rooms and tags. Click to place the new room and tag. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and press ENTER. 23 Using the same method. type Entry. type Kitchen. click Room. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.18 Click the room text label.

clear Room Separation. but they need to be tagged. and moving clockwise. on the Model Categories tab. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Room Tag. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The rooms are already placed. under Floor Plans. 29 On the Design Bar. expand Lines.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. clear Leader. in the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Level 1.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

and press ENTER. For 105. For 104. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. for Name. and press ENTER. for room 101. next to Rows. type Building Entry. select Storage. 10 Edit the number to be 101. add 5 more rooms. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. click New. For 102. 101-106. For 103. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. type Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. The room Number is U17-46. select Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. type Storage. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 .

double-click Level 1.■ For 106. 4 Click OK twice. click the Lines field.rvt. expand Lines. In the Lines field. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. under Visibility. select 9. click the Color field. click the bright green swatch. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and modify room names. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . For Weight. 13 Save the file. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. For Room Separation. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Under Custom colors. type Stair. place rooms from a program list. and press ENTER. you add room separation lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

9 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room. draw the horizontal line.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Room Separation. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . First.

14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. type 2400 mm. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. for Room. select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).

under Floor Plans. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 20 While pressing CTRL. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Level 1. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. click Modify. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 17 On the Design Bar. place the following rooms. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. and zoom in to the Corridor. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 Using the same method. double-click Room Schedule.

236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. type Units. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. select Base Finish. 31 For Key Name. and click Add. under Category. click Modify. for Rows. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. type As Selected. and for all 3 finishes. 30 On the Options Bar. and Wall Finish. (Element Properties). Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 Open the Room Schedule. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click 23 On the Design Bar. under Available fields. 27 Select Schedule keys. select Rooms. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. clear Room Bounding. click New.21 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. Floor Finish.

for Available fields. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. under Identity Data. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 33 In the Project Browser. under Other.32 Using the same method. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. 43 In the Filter dialog. for Fields. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. and click OK. and click OK. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 42 On the Options Bar. click Edit. select Units. 38 Under U17-8. 36 Click OK twice. click Check None. under Floor Plans. select Rooms. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 37 Open the Room Schedule. and click Properties. select Room Style. for Room Style. click (Filter Selection). 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 On the Options Bar. and click Add. under Schedules/Quantities. select Units.

3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. click the Color Scheme field. and click Properties. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. (Duplicate). and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 48 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and 106. right-click Level 1.rvt. and double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .46 Open the Room Schedule. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. click OK. select Public. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). under Floor Plans. 104. under Views (all). For rooms 102 and 105. under Graphics. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. for Name. select Room Style. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. at the warning prompt. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. click 5 For Title. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. expand Floor Plans. and apply it to the Level 1 view. type Room Type. 103. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Color. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Service.

21 In the second row of the table (Public). click the value in the Color column.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Edit. and clear Room Separation. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. under Visibility. click Edit Color Scheme. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Schemes. click Modify. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click OK. select Room Type. click Color Scheme Legend. expand Lines. 19 On the Options Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . select the color legend. clear Visible. 14 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. under Graphics. 29 Click OK twice. type 5 mm. click Modify. and click OK. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Custom color. for Swatch Width. 23 Using the same method. 28 Under Title Text. for Size. type 25 mm. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. (Element Properties). 24 Click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select blue. 30 On the Design Bar.22 In the Color dialog. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. respectively. on the Options Bar.

39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. select Room Type. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and select Properties. and click OK. under Sections. right-click Building Section. under Sections. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. click Edit. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. for Color Scheme. 35 Click OK twice. under Visibility. double-click Building Section. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Rooms. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. under Graphics.

45 While pressing CTRL. select Public. under Identity Data. click . select Units. under Identity Data. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 42 In the Filter dialog.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. (Filter Selection). for Room Style. and click OK. 46 Click . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. click Check None. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar.

TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. type Suites. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. excluding the stairwell spaces. 54 While pressing CTRL. select Service. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click . for Rows. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Style Schedule. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. under Key Name for the new row. click New. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section.

for Room Style. and click OK. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Volume Computations. under Identity Data. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. The color fill extends to the roof. verify that At wall finish is selected. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. select Suites. select the room on the left side of the top floor. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.55 Click . but not beyond it. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. The color fill will extend to the roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. 59 Under Room Area Computation. and click OK.

the dining room. 70 For Limit Offset. type -254 mm. under Constraints. 72 On the Design Bar. and the living room. 68 Click . under Constraints. 67 On the first level. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. type 0. click Modify. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). for Upper Limit. select the stairwell room. and click 65 For Limit Offset. select Level 2. select Loft.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 71 Click OK. 66 Click OK. . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit.0. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 .

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}.73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Family and Type.EPDM. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. click Modify. and click Add. select Roofs. select Family and Type. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 3 While pressing CTRL. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. Select Grand totals. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . and click OK. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 9 Using the same method. select Material: Description. under Available fields. under Category.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. For Then by.

right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and click OK twice. under Other. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Available fields. click Estimated Cost. select Calculate totals. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Currency. 23 For Field formatting. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Edit.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. for Fields. 20 For Formula. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. for Name. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Material: Area. and click Properties. 19 For Type. and under Fields. type Estimated Cost. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Calculate totals. for Material: Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Cost. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 21 Click OK. click the Formatting tab.40 50.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Under Field formatting. 12 Click OK. and click Add.

select $. you create an exiting plan for the building. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 31 Save the file. 27 In the Format dialog. regardless of category. which inserts commas after every three digits. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. you create a shared parameter file. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. and reporting the shared parameters. You draw a travel path line. In this lesson. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. tag the line. 30 Click OK twice. 28 For Unit symbol. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 26 In the Project Units dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. either within family components or within the project template. 29 Select Use digit grouping. for Currency. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. click the Format value. These shared parameters can be added to any family. for Rounding.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. and are defined and stored in an external file.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. and schedule the total distance of each path. adding the shared parameters to a family. can be used for any number-based parameter. creating a generic tag to tag the family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. not just for currency. Digit grouping. ensuring consistency across families and projects.

8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. for Name. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click New.rvt. type Travel Distance. for File name.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Type of Parameter. type Exiting. 7 Under Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click Save. click Training Files. under Groups. select Length. click Create. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name.txt. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. type OfficeStandardsParameters. type Path ID. and click OK. 9 Under Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.

11 Click OK. under Parameter Data. select Constraints. 12 In the Family Types dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 13 Click Apply. 3 On the Design Bar. 10 Using the same method. group it under Dimensions. 4 In the Family Types dialog. select Shared parameter. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. Click Training Files. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 9 In the Family Types dialog. click Load into Projects. 14 On the Design Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 8 Select Instance. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. and select Instance. following the equals symbol (=). verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click Select. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 15 If necessary. If you have multiple projects open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click OK. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. type Length. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Family Types. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. in the Load into Projects dialog. under Dimensions. for Group parameter under. under Parameters. and click OK. under Parameter Type. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt. for Travel Distance Formula. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rfa. and click OK. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Parameters.

under Category Parameters. click parameter(s) to label). (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Label.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. select Travel Distance. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. click Select. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 24 Click OK twice. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.rft. click Label. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Training Files. click (Add Parameter). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. under Parameters. 19 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and move it down. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.28 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. and press DELETE. for File Name.rvt is selected. 35 Save the file. 29 In the drawing window. 33 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Load into Projects. select Path ID. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and click OK.

under Floor Plans.Level 1. double-click Exiting Plan . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Component. select Chain. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Placing. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. above the exterior door as shown. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. After the lines are tagged. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.rvt. and click in the center of the corridor.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. under Constraints. under Floor Plans. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.Tagging. type 1-1. click Modify. for Path ID. verify that Chain is selected. move the cursor near the right corner. 12 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). click Component. 17 On the Options Bar.Level 2. and click outside of the building. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. select the 2 dashed travel lines. Placing. double click Exiting Plan . clear Leader. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.7 Move the cursor down. 10 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . 13 While pressing CTRL. click Tag ➤ By Category. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. through the door. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and click above the door to the stair. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor down. and click in the stair. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 21 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

28 While pressing CTRL. click Tag ➤ By Category. 30 Using the same method. click Modify.Tagging. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. type 2-1. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 33 For Name. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. Placing. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify.24 On the Design Bar.

you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 50 Save the file. under Other. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab.rvt. 40 Click the Formatting tab. select Travel Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. click Edit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 38 For Sort by. select Path ID and Travel Distance. in the third field. select Path ID. 36 For Filter by. while pressing CTRL. select contains. and click Add. 43 In the Project Browser. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and in the third field. click Training Files. under Available fields. for Filter. select Path ID. under Schedules/Quantities. 46 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. type 2-. select Calculate totals. in the second field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and click Rename. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter by. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. type 1-. 42 Click OK. 49 Click OK twice. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 41 Under Fields. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Properties. and under Field formatting. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. in the first field. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click the Fields tab.Partitions .Interiors ➤ C10 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select the following fields. 4 Under Available fields.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . for Assembly Code. and click Properties. and click View. under Identity Data. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click . expand C . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Click OK twice.Fixed Partitions. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Value field. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Categories. and select C1010145 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. select Walls. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the schedule. right-click Generic . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.152 mm. right-click the Design Bar.

260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type Revit_Project. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. for Database Name.rvt. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and click Next. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 9 Under Directories. and click Next. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 1 On the File menu.11 Close the exercise file. the database display may be different than that shown. under Database. 6 Click Finish. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. click the File Data Source tab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 3 Click New. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 8 In the New Database dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. select a location for the database file.mdb. click Training Files. click Create. and click OK to create the database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.mdb).

so that each table of elements includes an Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 13 Close the exercise file. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Additionally. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. For example. in addition to the Id column.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

262 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. 263 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. like a standard door header condition. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. add detail components.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. 297 . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. plywood. These components display at the required scale. you trace over the building model geometry. In the callout view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In order to detail from the building model. and metal studs.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. region objects. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The roof overhang detail displays. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select As underlay. You load detail components. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 5 In the alert dialog. After you add components. They are also view specific. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. double-click the detail callout head. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. which means that all detail components. and click Open. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. you detail the view of the roof edge. click Training Files. and insulation objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Detail Component. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. Exact location is not important. as well as detail lines.rfa. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the drawing area.Detailing the View In this exercise.

select Corrugated Metal. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the drawing area. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. and click OK. 16 Click OK twice. enter 406. 13 In the Name dialog.5mm. 15 For Spacing. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. for Pattern ➤ Detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. Detailing the View | 299 . click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.8 Delete the component. click (Element Properties). click Repeating Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Duplicate.

25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 24 In the Type Selector. click (Move). click Detail Component. and click Open. 22 On the Options Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.rfa. click Training Files. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Load. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. and on the Edit toolbar. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. click Training Files.Because you still have several components to load. and place it in the detail view as shown. Detailing the View | 301 . click Detail Component. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 29 On the Design Bar. and click Open.rvt. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 31 To properly orient the component. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. you load them as a group from a single file. 30 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times.

38 Select the horizontal segment. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. click the Flip instance arrows. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 37 Click Modify.

Detailing the View | 303 . as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 42 Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. ■ Click Modify. click (Move). select to near side. enter 140mm. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. For Offset.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Insulation.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. Like detail components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component.rvt. you add lines to your detail. 51 Click Modify. 47 In the Type Selector. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Lines. they are view specific. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Type Selector. meaning they display only in this view.45 In the Type Selector. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select Thin Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. as shown.

11 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. select Thin Lines. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 On the Design Bar. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. enter 10mm. Adding Detail Lines | 305 .4 Click Modify. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. as shown. and press ENTER. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. For Offset. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component.

select Chain. click (Draw). 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown. and clear Chain.

select Do not display. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Thin Lines. For Offset. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and press ENTER. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm.18 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select the Penthouse level line. draw the detail lines as shown. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select Vapor Barrier. 24 On the View Control Bar. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. When you turn the display model off. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. right-click. Click (Pick Lines). What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.

press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line. Adding Text Notes on page 308. you add text notes to complete the detail. click Detail Component. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.29 On the Design Bar. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 32 Click Modify.

Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Enter the text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. Adding Text Notes | 309 . Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Dimension. 2 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. and click to place the dimension.

Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail.7 Select the dimension line. click Select All Instances. enter Typ. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. (Filter Selection). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename.rvt. on the Options Bar. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and save the exercise file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.Keynotes. and click OK. right-click. and click the dimension text. and click OK. for Suffix. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. right-click. Creating Detail Components on page 310. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. right-click. select a text note. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Roof Overhang Detail . under Text Fields.. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and press DELETE. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.7 Click Modify. pressing TAB. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 16 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.rft. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. in the Type Selector. Creating Detail Components | 311 . select Medium Lines. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. select all the coping linework. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain. click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. and click Open. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 14 Click Modify.

click Detail Component. 23 Using a window. click Training Files. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 28 On the Options Bar. click .Keynotes view is not the open view. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Load into Projects. for File name. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 31 Using the same method used previously. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 27 On the Design Bar.18 In the Save As dialog. navigate to your preferred location. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Open. double-click it in the Project Browser. clear Detail Items. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you place keynotes on objects. delete the underlying linework. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 22 Click Modify. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 21 To place the component. select the coping. and the component can be placed in the detail. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. While pressing SHIFT. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog.rfa. and click Save. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Load. enter Roof Edge. 30 In the drawing area. The original linework remains selected. 26 Press DELETE.

and click OK. click Edit/New.D11. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the metal fascia with drip edge. click Keynote ➤ Element. Roof Edge4. (Element Properties).B5. 19mm Plywood. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.rfa. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. use keynote 06160. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 6 Click Modify. For the metal coping. In the Keynotes dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes | 313 . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 2 In the alert dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Click to place the leader arm. use keynote 07645.C1. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click Open. click Training Files.

D11. 15 In the Type Selector. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 18 Save the file. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to 07645. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 50 x 200. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 22mm Corrugated Steel .I1. click in the Value column. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 50 x 300. use keynote 06110. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.20 Ga.G1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. use keynote 06110. 17 Keynote the component. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. use keynote 06160. and click . You do this in order to keynote the component.F1. using keynote 07460. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.F1. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110.9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . For the 19mm Plywood Siding. select Corrugated Metal. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. FasciaProfile_1.D1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314.A8. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. use keynote 09250. For the 50 x 150.

and click (Element Properties). click Detail Component. for File name. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component. navigate to your preferred location.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 19 In the Name dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 11 Press DELETE. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click Save. 9 On the Design Bar. select Medium Line Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. click Load. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 6 Lock the line. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. and click Open.rvt.rft. click Load into Projects. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 Click Modify. and click Modify. 5 In the drawing area. select Medium Lines. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Training Files. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. click Duplicate. and select the right end point. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.

click in the Value column. 29 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. 47 Select the component.A5. click Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. 34 In the Name dialog. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 37 Click OK 3 times. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 27 On the Design Bar. and hidden) used in the view. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . click (Move). and assign it keynote 06110. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click the lower end at the break line. 42 Using the same method used previously. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. against the 19mm plywood.A1. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. You add the components to the project and keynote them. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 44 On the Design Bar.G1. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and click . and click OK. click Edit/New. and click . 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.25 Next. invisible. 49 With the component selected. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 40 Click Modify. enter EPDM Membrane. on the Edit toolbar. click Duplicate. 31 Select the component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Selector. 48 Using the same method used previously. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 30 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 41 Select the component just added. and click . and assign it keynote 07260.

leaving the detail component lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 53 On the Options Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select Chain. 55 Click Modify. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 52 In the Type Selector. and click .

name the component Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area. 61 In the drawing area. click Detail Component.A4. and Vapor Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Keynote ➤ Element. select Invisible Lines. select the component. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 68 In the drawing area.rfa. click Load into Projects. 67 In the Type Selector. 60 On the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Air Barrier.58 Using the method used previously. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 50 x 200 Framing. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. in the Type Selector. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.A9. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter 07463. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and assign it keynote 07210.. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and click . 3 In the text editor. and press TAB.txt. and press TAB. 70 Using the method used previously. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and press ENTER. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 71 In the drawing area. add a keynote for the component. and close the text editor.rvt. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A4. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. under Keynote Table. name the component Batt Insul. click Browse. 72 Save the file. Enter 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A1.69 Select the component. The database file opens in a text editor. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.

You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. navigate to 07463. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. After you create a drafting view. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click OK. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. and click Open. and click to place the note. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click to place the leader. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).txt. select Absolute. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. under Path Type. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 13 Click Modify. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. click Keynote ➤ Element.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 11 Click Modify. These details do not update with changes to the building model.A1. In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. select all the keynotes. 9 In the drawing area. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 14 Save the file.

dwg. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and click Rename. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. enter EPDM Metal Coping. select Black and White.rvt. verify that Auto .Center to Center is selected. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click Open. For Positioning. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. and click OK. right-click Drafting 1. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click OK. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. select 1 : 5. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. for Scale. For Colors. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.

and use the callout grips to move the callout head. click Rename. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 6 Select the callout. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. click Edit/New. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Callout. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and click OK. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 12 Click OK twice. 5 Click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for New. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. enter Detail . 10 In the Rename dialog. delete the existing value. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and click Properties. 3 On the Options Bar.No Reference. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Reference other view.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). and double-click the callout.Elev. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.No Reference). 18 Save the file. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet./Sect./Det. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. click Modify. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. double-click A105 . 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Edit/New. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. . for Name. 14 Click OK 3 times. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Filled Region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Detail Component.rvt. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Region Properties. Board. 11 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. enter Gyp.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. and click OK. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.

5mm. click 22 On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . click . and on the Edit toolbar. click (Draw). select the left and bottom edges of the region. 20 On the Design Bar. and enter 20.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the width dimension. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 19 In the Type Selector. (Mirror). select Wide Lines.

Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 33 Click OK 3 times. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Finish. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 25 Click Modify. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 24 Select the mirrored region. click Region Properties. click Filled Region.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Name. and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 30 In the Name dialog. Move the cursor up. click Duplicate. select Wood . click Edit/New. enter Wood .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click (Align). verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . Draw a rectangle as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. click . sketch the new region as shown. 38 On the Design Bar.5mm. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. verify that the thickness is 19mm.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. in the Type Selector. click Filled Region. and select the right edge of the wood region. click (Rectangle). 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select Medium Lines.

enter 6mm. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 47 Click the reference plane. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).42 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. and press ENTER. For Offset. (Align). click 48 Click Modify. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm.

52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor down 305mm. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 25mm. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. For Offset. 56 On the Design Bar. enter 0. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Select Chain. click (Trim/Extend). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line. Move the cursor right 25mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and click to select the point.

enter 3mm. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 61 Click Modify. 68 Click Modify. 65 On the Options Bar. 69 Select the bolt. select Medium Lines. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.rfa. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 76. and press ENTER. 62 Select the left detail line. click Load. top. click Detail Lines. and click Open. 58 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. and right edges of the door panel region. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.2mm. click Detail Component. select the height dimension. 60 Select the left.

click Load. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select Wide Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Lines. click Training Files. 76 In the Type Selector. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa. 71 On the Options Bar. and click Open. use the images as a guide. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

82 Select the rectangle. (Mirror). 84 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify.78 On the Design Bar. click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. click . select Thin Lines. 79 In the Type Selector.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 92 Select the line. click (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 89 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 90 In the Type Selector.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.

102 In the Type Selector. enter 3mm. click Detail Component. click . 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 99 Click Modify. and click to place the arc as shown. 101 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 97 On the Options Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 95 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. select M_Break Line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. select the length dimension.

Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 110 Select the dimension line. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 108 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Dimension. and click Modify. and click Modify. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 106 Click to place the dimension. click Dimension.5mm Arial. 107 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip.

click Dimension. select Replace With Text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. and then click the dimension text. and enter Varies. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 118 Select Modify to end the command. under Dimension Value.2. and click the dimension text. 114 Click OK.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. select Replace With Text. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.5mmArial. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Below. 113 Under Text Fields. enter See Schedule. under Dimension Value. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.

122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . Enter 225 mm @ Type C. select the gypsum board region on the left. and click Modify. and click to place the text. 126 In the drawing area. Board. 125 In the Options Bar. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 123 Click OK. click to create an arced leader. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click Text. 128 Select the note. 127 Enter Gyp. and on the Options Bar.121 Click OK.

131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. 339 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. and double-click East. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.

for Number of Leaders. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. type 1. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Training Files. 8 Select the keynote.rfa. click Symbol. click Modify. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Hexagon. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar.

on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 13 Select the tag.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. for Text. and click OK. under Identity Data. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 341 . and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Copy). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. type Seal existing doors and insulate.

14 With the copy selected. 17 Click OK. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and on the Options Bar. click Copy. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. type B. 19 With the tag selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror). clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. type Repair existing door surround. 15 For Text. on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. and click. click (Element Properties). 18 Using the same method.

Clean exterior brick wall. Remove all existing windows. 22 Optionally. Tuckpoint as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround.21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean existing concrete loading dock. click Modify. using the table as a reference. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

and for Alignment. expand Sheets (all). for Sort by. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.Elevations. and double-click A103 . 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type Description. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type 6 mm. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click OK. 26 Click OK. Select Text. On the Formatting tab. verify that Arial is selected. 28 In the Project Browser. type Mark. format. and click Add. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Clean cut and repair wall as required. On the Appearance tab. and select Bold. for Note block name. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. select Exterior Construction Notes. for Header text. expand Schedules/Quantities. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Heading. and click Add. select Tag. under Available fields. 29 In the Project Browser. Create. type Exterior Construction Notes. 27 In the column header (text). for the value. select Center. and drag it to the sheet.

33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.Title Sheet. double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. under Sheets (all). click Modify.31 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.rvt. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.

The drawing list displays. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. in the first field. and click Add.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. Select Sheet Name. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select does not equal. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Add. and in the third field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 5 In the list title field. On the Filter tab.Title Sheet. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type T. for Sort by. for Filter by. double-click T . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the second field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. under Sheets (all). ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Index.

Finally. doors. and so on). annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 11 Save the file. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Training File Using Legends | 347 . For the text.9 On the Design Bar. windows. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. door frame schedule. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. and door frames. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. On construction documents. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. On construction documents. click Modify.

Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click . click Edit/New.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Name. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . and click OK twice. type Legend Text. 10 For Text Size. select Arial. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create a text type with the necessary size. type 3mm. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.Open Level Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. and click OK.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. for Name.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Text. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Symbol. type Typical Symbol Legend. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 For Text Font.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. expand Legends. and click to place it. expand Sheets (all). and double-click A101 .Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 14 Working from the top down. and for Leader. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. verify that is selected.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 16 In the Project Browser.

23 Save the file. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 19 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click A102 .Unit 18. under Sheets. 21 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.17 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 For Scale. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. type 900 mm. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select 1 : 50. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Section. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.rvt. and click OK. 5 On the View Control Bar.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. for Name. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. For View. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. For Host length. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and press ENTER. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select Medium for Detail Level. type 4th Floor Wall Types. click Legend Component.

for Family. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. for Leader. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. and on the Options Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 10 Select the second wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. click Text.

The text note with leader is added to the legend. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click New Sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 23 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). select Level 4.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 19 Type the following text. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. under Floor Plans. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

under Legends. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .25 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The open drawings are both visible. 29 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. drag it onto the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. click Modify to end the command. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet.

Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select Detail Level: Medium. select the Wall Type 2 component. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 33 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. click (Match Type). 35 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.

or changes in building material availability. Using the table. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision.36 Optionally. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. click 37 Save the file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. These changes can be due to owner requests. contractor inquiries. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. In this exercise. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. double-click Level 4. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.

verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . When Issued is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. if the active revision is number 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type a date. verify that Per Project is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. In general. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. yet as concise as possible. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. When you use this option.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. If you select Per Sheet. for Numbering. For example. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In most instances. If Visible is not selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 7 Under Show. 5 For Description.

5 Select the divider. 6 On the Design Bar. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor up. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. double-click Level 4. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you make changes to the project floor plan. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 On the Edit toolbar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.8 Click OK. click (Move). 3 Select the divider. 9 Save the file.rvt. including revision number and revision date. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.

and click OK. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. 8 In the drawing area. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click Finish Sketch. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. In the Snaps dialog. click near the partition you moved. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. select Snaps Off. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

14 In the Object Styles dialog. for Line Weight. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select 6. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. click the Annotation Objects tab. you load a revision tag into the project. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 16 Click OK. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file.

which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes.rfa. click OK. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar.rvt. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the drawing area. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 11 Click to place the tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. you need to add one. scroll down to Revision Clouds. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click Training Files. 6 Click Load. 5 In the Tags dialog. Working with Revisions In this exercise. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because you chose to number by project. 12 Save the file. 4 On the Options Bar. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. click Tags. 8 In the Tags dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Leader. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. double-click Level 4. You then issue a revision. and because the revision is the first in the project.

with the description Relocate Door. type Modify Paving Area. under Sheets. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. You do this by issuing the revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Click OK. click Add. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You can continue to add revisions. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. and click OK. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.rvt. 7 For Description. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. and enter a date for the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 8 Add another revision row. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. you prevent further changes to the revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Unnamed. select Issued. and enter a date. you can no longer modify it. double-click A107 .

double-click A107 . and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select the revision cloud. 11 On the Drafting tab. under Floor Plans.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 10 In the Project Browser.Modify Paving Area.Unnamed. 13 Click Finish Sketch. Working with Revisions | 363 . 15 On the Options Bar. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. select Revision Cloud. apply Seq.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 20 On the Project Browser. click to add a revision clouds. for Revision. 12 In the drawing area. under Sheets (all). Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 2 . 3 . double-click Level 4. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. in the drawing area. select Seq. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 19 To add tags. select Tag ➤ By Category. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab.

In order to make formatting changes (appearance. beginning with "D". and rotation) to the revision schedule. you edit the titleblock family. select Alphabetic. For each revision. 26 In the drawing area. for Numbering. height. select the titleblock. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. delete the first 3 characters. Click Options. You do this so that the revision can be changed. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. clear Issued. for Sequence. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 25 Click OK twice.

Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. right-click Revision Schedule. and drag it above the schedule area. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Family. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. click Modify. Clear Blank row before data.27 On the Options Bar. click Yes. click Edit. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. for Build Schedule. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 34 On the Design Bar. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. select Bottom-up. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Appearance. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 33 Select the schedule header. under Other. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Select Grid lines. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Load into Projects. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Select Outline. and click Properties. 28 In the alert dialog. and press DELETE. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Yes.

46 Click OK twice. select User defined. for Height. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the schedule is restricted to a specific size. enter Rev.. right-click Revision Schedule. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. and click Properties. select the revision schedule. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. open the titleblock family for editing. When the height property is variable. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Formatting. 40 Select the revision schedule header. under Other. and on the Options Bar. for Rotation on Sheet. for Heading. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 45 On the Appearance tab.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. With a user-defined height. select 90° Counterclockwise. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously.

text. click Yes. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. you learn to import information (such as images. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . 51 Save the file.

Importing Image Files In this exercise. under Sheets. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and place it on a sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click T . click Text.Title Sheet.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. for Leader.Title Sheet. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader. click Training Files. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.JPG.

you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. with the new text box still selected. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. click Modify. 11 Save the file.doc text file in another window. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 6 Select the text.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.

xls. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click A102 . 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. select the document writer. 3 In Microsoft Excel. under Sheets. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. and click Save. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 5 Click OK. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 10 On the Design Bar.rvt. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.JPG. click Modify. type Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.mdi. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Printer. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click Desktop.Unit 18.JPG. This process may vary from system to system. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Print. for File name. and saved as Fixture Schedule. This step has been completed for you. 12 Save the file. for Name. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.

Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. To effectively document this project. 371 . for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. under Level 2. The dependent view opens. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Level 2. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. click Zoom To Fit. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. double-click Level 2. 6 In the drawing area.Aviary. 4 In the Rename View dialog.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 .

9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region).

click Zoom To Fit. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 15 Select the crop region. 12 In the Project Browser. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Rename. for Name. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.Labs. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout. 11 In the Project Browser.10 Click in the drawing area. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). enter Level 2 .

double-click Level 2.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click Modify. under Floor Plans. 20 Click in the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region). click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.

Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar.

28 For Line Pattern. click Level 2 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 27 Under Matchline. and click OK. expand Sheets. select 9. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click the Annotation Objects tab. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. for Name. 31 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Aviary. and drag it onto the sheet.Aviary. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click OK. right-click A101 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash.Unnamed. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. for Line Weight. under Floor Plans.

38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. and place the Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 39 On the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.Aviary is selected. for Target view.

41 On the Options Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. for Target view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 .Labs. 44 On the Design Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 49 If. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click the far right control. under Floor Plans.Aviary. double-click Level 2 . right-click. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 47 On the View Control Bar. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.46 In the Project Browser. after modifying the annotation crop region. click (Show Crop Region). 48 Select the crop region.

select all views in the list. click Zoom To Fit. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 53 In the Select Views dialog. right-click Level 2. 51 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. and click Apply Dependent Views. 52 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. expand Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 54 In the Project Browser. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. but are not placed on sheets. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale.

right-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.57 On the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The matchline is already placed in the view. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. click Zoom To Fit.

Right. and click OK. select the Crop Region. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. cropping the view to the aviary. and drag it toward the center of the view. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 11 Select the crop region. 9 In the Project Browser.The dependent view opens. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. cropping the view to the lab building. click (Hide Crop Region).Left. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. right-click South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South Elevation . 5 In the drawing area. for Name. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. enter South Elevation . for Name. 8 In the Project Browser.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View on page 403. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The perspective view displays. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

Depending on camera placement. under Floor Plans. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. double-click Site. as shown. With the camera shown.3 Zoom out. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. right-click 3D View 1. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. as necessary. in the Project Browser. If the camera is not shown in the view. and click Show Camera. and select the crop boundary. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and adjust the field of vision. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground.

10 Save the file.6 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. enter Exterior . and click Rename.Day to open the view. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. and click OK.Day.

modify render settings. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. You then duplicate the view. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.Day. under 3D Views.rvt. and render a daytime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

select Spring Equinox. 6 Click OK twice. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. and click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog. select Edit/New. 3pm. for Setting. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. enter Spring Equinox .Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. for Sun. and click Render. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You create a location and time for the rendering. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. 8 Under Quality. 7 In the Rendering dialog. under Background. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Lighting. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Medium. 3 In the Rendering dialog. for New. You adjust cloud settings as required. click (Show Rendering Dialog).Santa Monica. In this case. NOTE If a background image is required.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.9 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. For Files of type. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. After the image is rendered. Click Save. click Export. click Show the model. 10 In the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.png).

under Group Options. To select a sequential list. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.Day. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK.Day view to Exterior . 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . add 30 :Sconce Light . right-click Exterior . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. press and hold SHIFT.Night. and select the last light. verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V. 25 Using the same method.Night. click New. select Exterior: Artificial only. for Name. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 27 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. select the first light. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under 3D Views. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Exterior . To create a similar view using different rendering settings. you duplicate the view and change the settings. click Render. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. 22 Using the same method.120V through 14 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . for Name. dialog.Night view open. under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK. click New.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. enter Pool House Lights. under Ungrouped Lights. on the View Control Bar.Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options. 16 With the Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog. enter Pool Lights.Flat Round : 60W . under Lighting. click OK. click Dialog). and click Move to Group.120V to the Pool Lights group. and click Artificial Lights. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.

the exposure can be modified to improve the output. under Image. 32 Save the file.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. In this example. you change the brightness of the exposure. click Show the model. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. enter 4. 30 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. After the image is rendered. click Adjust Exposure.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and finally. render the views. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click Component. ■ (Rotate). 5 On the Design Bar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. Exact placement is not important. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. the person’s line of sight. 6 Select the figure.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select RPC Female : YinYin. double-click Level 1. and place the component inside the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . and on the Edit toolbar. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. select Cast Reflections.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. By default. 12 Click OK 3 times. on the Options Bar. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. under Parameters. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). 14 Save the file. click Edit. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. you can enable this option. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. under Identity Data. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. In order to see the figure’s reflection. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar.

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 .rvt. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.

and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.The perspective view displays. under Extents.

8 In the Project Browser. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 9 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click South. 11 In the 3D view. select the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . under Floor Plans.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 1. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select the section box. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view. 14 In the 3D view. right-click. size the box as shown.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.15 Maximize the 3D view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . 17 Save the file. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. To create a daytime view. and render the interior view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and curtain walls. doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.

Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. under 3D Views. You can specify a lower quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. click Render. clear Pool Lights. After these settings are established. 7 Under Quality. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. under Lighting. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename.Night. 5 Click Artificial Lights. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. and click OK. for Setting.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter Interior . and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 3 On the View Control Bar. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.rvt. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 4 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. click (Show Rendering Dialog). you turn them off for this scene. select Draft.

(Show Rendering Dialog). the daylight portals can be turned on. select Edit. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. 13 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only. click Copy To Custom. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect.Night. for Daylight Portal Options. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. right-click Interior .Santa Monica. and click OK. For more information on daylight portals. By default they are turned off. and click Render. but the space will receive standard daylighting. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. In this case. For sunlit interiors. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 17 In the Rendering dialog. for Sun. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . you must create a custom setting. select Curtain Walls. in order to turn on daylight portals. You create a view for the interior during the day. select Region.9 Close the Rendering dialog. for Scheme.Day. The preset schemes are read-only. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Spring Equinox . click 14 For Setting. 3pm. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.

Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK. click Show the model.18 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Properties). enter 1. enter 10. In the next steps. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Adjust Exposure. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. 20 In the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. For Saturation. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and close the Rendering dialog. under Image.

select Based on wood grain. 30 In the drawing area. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 23 With the column still selected. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . For Amount. for Setting. click the dimensions for Size. and click Render. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. the render time increases significantly. As size and DPI are increased. 29 In the Rendering dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Printer. select Wood. under Output Settings. enter 5''. Click OK. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. for Resolution. 24 In the Materials dialog. you can define the output and quality settings for final output.6. For Rotate. 26 Click Update Preview. and click OK. click OK. select High. select Unfinished. For Width. You change the varnish setting. and on the Options Bar. clear Region. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. click (Show Rendering Dialog). add a bump map to create texture. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. enter 90. For Bump. select the crop boundary. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar.

but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The rendered image displays. or section view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Usually. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. elevation. In a plan view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. but you can also define it in a 3D. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. The walkthrough path is a spline. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.

and open Common\c_Townhouse. and change unit formats as desired. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. If you prefer to use metric values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . expand Floor Plans. click Walkthrough.rvt. verify that Perspective is selected. on the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. right-click in the Design Bar. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. proceeds through the dining room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. on the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click Edit Walkthrough. enter 9''. enter 16''. for Width. verify that Field of view is selected. select the crop boundary. 14 Click . 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. If it is not. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. and select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size. 16 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 17 Click . 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 1. 11 Under Change. on the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 12 On the View menu.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. for Frame. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and click OK. and for Height. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

c_Townhouse. 2 On the Options Bar. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. click (Element Properties). 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. under Extents. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise.rvt. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Floor. proceed to the next exercise. clear Far Clip Active. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. and click OK.The walkthrough plays. press ESC. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428.

for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. select Path. 7 Click the third key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and drag it to the location shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).

6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 9 To play the walkthrough. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. hidden line. for Model Graphics Style. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. for Compressor. click Edit Walkthrough. and click Save. 3 Under Format. and click OK. c_Townhouse. enter 15. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. under Output Length. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. reducing the size of the image. shading with edges. . and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. The walkthrough is recorded. specifying the number of frames. select <Shading>. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. or rendering. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. double-click Walkthrough 1. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. on the Options Bar. under Walkthroughs. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. click File menu ➤ Save As. shading. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. for Frames/sec. When you export the walkthrough.rvt.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. In this tutorial. 431 . Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.

expand Floor Plans.Creating a Solar Study .Courtyard View In this exercise. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all).rvt. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. click Training Files. as shown. click Camera. A 3D view is created. (SteeringWheels). 4 On the View toolbar. and double-click 01 Entry. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click shown. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click Rename. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. expand 3D Views.5 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View. you create a section cutaway view. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. if necessary. 3 On the Design Bar. 9 On the File menu. 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. right-click 3D View 1. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. under Floor Plans. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. click Modify. enter Solar Study .

6 To view the section. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click Section 1. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. expand Sections. click . and click OK. and click Rename. click Modify. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. double-click the section head. click 10 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. as shown. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Project Browser. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right.

then Fine. right-click {3D}. do not display many elements in 3D. click Save. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. then select Medium. Typical plan views. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. click Callout. and click OK. 5 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 6 In the Rename View dialog. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 17 To hide the section box.14 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. including the house. and click OK. and click Rename. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. under Floor Plans. click . click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. 16 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. On the Annotation Categories tab. 18 On the File menu. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. you create a plan cutaway view. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. 15 In the Rename View dialog. In some cases. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise.

16 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the Roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. so you can see into the building from the top. as shown. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click (SteeringWheels). 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.8 On the View toolbar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.

under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Save. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. and click Rename. 21 On the File menu. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 19 In the Rename View dialog. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice.17 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.

or multi-day solar study. 9 In the Name dialog. USA. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. You can create a still. you specify the location. Los Angeles. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. click . single-day. expand Views (all). click . For this study. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 10 Under Place.Boston. click click OK. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. USA is selected.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and time. you specify the location. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.Creating Solar Studies . select Los Angeles. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . CA. and time range. . and click Duplicate. expand 3D Views. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. leave the slider at 50. 2 On the View Control Bar. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. date. enter Summer Solstice. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. MA. For the Single-Day solar study. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . date range. for City. For the Multi-Day solar study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. and click OK. 4 For Sun Position. Click the Single-Day tab.

Clear Ground Plane at Level. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click Save. for Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. enter 20 and press ENTER. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . 8 On the Options Bar. confirm that Summer Solstice. and click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. ■ For Time Interval. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 19 On the File menu. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles is selected. 7 On the Options Bar. for Date. click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Los Angeles. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 2008. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. select December 22. select Winter Solstice. click . Under Frame. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 16 In the Name dialog. and click Duplicate. 14 In this case. and click OK. enter 10 and press ENTER. under Frame. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. and click OK. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. select June 22. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. For Time Range. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. enter Winter Solstice. Los Angeles. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 2008. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 2 On the View Control Bar.

click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Los Angeles. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 13 On the View Control Bar. click . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click To play the animation from start to finish. click . .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click OK. select Summer Solstice.■ To display the next key frame. The solar study animation plays. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. on the Single-Day tab. double-click 01 Entry. . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click To display the next sequential frame. approximately as shown. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. . under Floor Plans. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Text. and click OK. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. for Sun Position. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.

■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click and enter Dining. On the Options Bar. approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. expand 3D Views. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Lines. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . 6 On the View Control Bar. click . as shown. 8 For Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 5 In the Project Browser.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Frame Range. and click OK. as shown. 12 In the drawing area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. select Section Boxes. Los Angeles. On the Annotation Categories tab. and enter 5 to 50. select the section box. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. under Output Length. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. if necessary. and click OK. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 11 To display the section box. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. ■ For Frames per second. on the Single-Day tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 15 To hide the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 14 Click outside of the section box. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15.

To view the animation. select Frame Range. To maintain the proportions of the frame. Under Format. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). or frame. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. of the animation separately. for Model Graphics Style. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443.Los Angeles. verify that Hidden Line is selected. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway .■ ■ Under Format. on the Single-Day tab. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. verify that Hidden Line is selected. you open each image. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Dimensions. For Frames per second. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . and click OK. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Los Angeles. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 2 On the View Control Bar. select AVI Files. click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Winter Solstice. for Compressor. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. and click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and enter 5 to 10. 3 For Sun Position. For Files of Type. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. For File Name. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Click OK. under Output Length. click . verify that the value is set to 15.

■ For Dimensions. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. enter 450 in the first field (width). In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Files of Type. click Save. select PNG. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Click OK. click the Desktop icon. such as JPEG. BMP. or any single-frame format. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. In this example. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. as shown: 9 On the File menu. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . depending on the Frame Range. TIFF. 8 Click Save. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. or GIF.Los Angeles. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. under 3D Views. For File name. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

specify 2:00 pm.Week Interval.Los Angeles . 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . USA. and click OK. For Time Interval. click the Multi-Day tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Name dialog. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select One week. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and on the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Boston. click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. for File name enter 2pm . clear Section Boxes. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. for Sun Position. For Time. MA. and click Duplicate. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 5 Select the roof.

and click Save.West or North . Click the Desktop icon. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. Re-orienting the Project | 447 .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you mirror a project. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. and annotations in non-drafting views. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. for Compressor. you mirror all model elements. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 17 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Length/Format dialog.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.South. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. such as East . ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Mirroring the Project In this exercise. for File Name. model views.

In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.West. select East . you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. For additional information. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the roof.West axis. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Then. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. The project is mirrored along the East . under 3D Views. 2 In the drawing area. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. and click OK.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 6 On the Standard toolbar. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. right-click. 5 In the warning dialog. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click the Still tab. specify 11:00 AM for time. and select Winter Solstice. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. 5 For Sun Position. click Apply. and click OK. For example. 11 For Sun Position. click . and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. 12 Under Date and Time. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click . on the Still tab. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. 8 For Sun Position. 10 Under Date and Time. select Cast Shadows. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 449 .

15 For Sun Position. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. and click OK. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and click OK. click . right click 01 Entry. select True North. When a project is started. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Floor Plans. click the Still tab. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. double-click 01 Entry. click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 14 On the View Control Bar. click OK. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. for Orientation. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). and select Winter Solstice. and click Properties. the view settings must be set for True North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. as shown. click toward the top of the screen. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 .■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select True North. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. enter True North Orientation. and click Properties.23 In the Project Browser. 32 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. click the Still tab. 33 For Sun Position. right-click. and click Element Properties. select True North Orientation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. right-click 01 Entry. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Apply. and click OK. and click OK. select Project North. right-click 01 Entry. right-click. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 27 In the Rename View dialog. for Orientation. for Orientation. and click OK. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North.

NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. and click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. for Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. for Compressor. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click OK. and click OK. Los Angeles. click Summer Solstice. Orienting to True North | 453 . For File Name. enter 600 in the first field. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Files of Type. verify that AVI Files is selected. under Format. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click the Single-Day tab. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Click Save. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. click the Desktop icon.

Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. Rendered views do not have this limitation. select Medium. For Sun. for Scheme. Under Lighting. under Quality. In this exercise. for Setting. select Winter Solstice. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click OK. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Interior: Sun only. under 3D Views. for Date and Time. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Edit/New.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. and click Duplicate. under 3D Views. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. under Settings. Since a rendered image is temporary. and click OK. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Name dialog. select 12/22. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. click Render. 1 In the Project Browser. capturing it. 3 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 In the Project Browser. and exporting it as a JPEG image. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and 2:00 PM. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.

verify that JPEG Files is selected. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Export.6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. enter living area_winter solstice. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Desktop. For Files of type. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. and click OK. click Save to Project. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. and click Save.

456 .

or the client. type. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Co-house. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. and details. In this tutorial. Whether the audience is the general contractor. sections. They include rendering. and section boxes. you explore the stylistic approach. a consultant. Using the pre-built building model. an outside reviewer. Other tools in the software. For the realistic approach. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you can choose between realism and stylistics. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. length.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. elevations. When organizing presentation graphics. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. In this series of exercises. linework. however. 457 . You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. advanced model graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click in the drawing area. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. exit the menu. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. click Training Files. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . and click Rename. Cnst. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and clear DOWN Text. 7 Under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 8 Click OK. expand the Stairs category. this represents the view getting smaller. UP Text. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. dimensions. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 In the Save As directory. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . No annotations display in the view. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Save. and other annotations in this view.rvt. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. elevations. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. sections. and Up Arrow. Down Arrow. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

Time and Place. you can select any city. for Date and Time. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. specify 10/27. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Cast Shadows. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Cnst. click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 For Place. however. The higher the number. 9 For City. At that place. on the Still tab. Within a project. you can create. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. modify. For Sun Position. 6 Under Settings. NOTE For this step. MA. select By Date. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 12 Click OK. and select 1st Flr. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. If you select a different city. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. click (Shadows Off). and click OK. specify 35. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. the darker the shadows. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 1:00 PM. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Place tab. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.rvt. select Boston. ■ For Contrast. double-click it in the Project Browser. click .

. click (Shadows On). Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. clear Ground Plane at Level. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. under Settings. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click OK. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.

5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Arch Portrait. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Sheet. 6 On the Design Bar. and notice the view title. The viewport displays at the cursor. 4 In the Views dialog. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. right-click the Design Bar. and click to place it. and click View. click Modify. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . and click Add View to Sheet. and click OK. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. and click Activate View. The viewport no longer displays a view title. and click OK. click Edit/New. For this analytique. click OK. select No. 9 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click . you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Show Title. To accomplish this. enter Presentation. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 12 In the Name dialog.

The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. click Filled Region. If necessary. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and the boundary of the region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 22 On the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 .This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click . select Invisible lines. and select Chain. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. fill properties. 18 On the Options Bar. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. When you finish drawing the chain. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 20 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. click . 17 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

29 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. click . Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. click Duplicate. for Fill Pattern. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. scroll down. 25 In the Name dialog. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. under Identity Data. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. enter Solid Black. under Graphics.24 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Presentation. under Name. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. select Solid fill. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click View Properties. for Sheet Name.

Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise.rvt. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click South.

12 Under Shadow. exit the menu. click in the drawing area. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Pattern Overrides. By changing the angle of the sun. click in the Walls row.2 In the Project Browser. click Override. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 16 In the Name dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click . and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 For Contrast. under Visibility. under Elevations. click (Shadows Off). under Settings. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. and click OK. specify 35. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click Advanced Model Graphics. expand the Doors category. right-click Copy of South. and click OK. click OK. Time and Place. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Cast Shadows. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 9 Click OK. on the Model Categories tab. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Duplicate. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. clear Visible. 18 For Time. 14 For Sun Position. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select By Date. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. enter Presentation South Elevation. scroll up. 11 On the View Control Bar. and clear Elevation Swing. specify 2:30 PM.

select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).rvt.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click Add View. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

9 Proceed with the next lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 .

and use the flip arrows if necessary. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.rvt. click Section. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. for Scale. select 1: 100. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. click Callout. select 1 : 100. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . expand Sections (Callout 1). To fit correctly in the analytique. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily.Section 2 is added to the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this. for Scale. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. this view needs to be rotated 180°.

expand the Doors category. scroll up. click Modify. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 17 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Walls row. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Sections (Callout 1). 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 10 In the Project Browser.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Visibility. and click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Override. enter Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible. and clear Elevation Swing.

24 Proceed with the next exercise.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. (Hide Crop Region). 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 22 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . click The crop regions no longer display. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. When you select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.

2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 In the Name dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify the following: Under Shadow. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ For Sun Position.rvt. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. under Sections (Callout 1). select Cast Shadows. click Duplicate. In addition. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). In the steps that follow. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . in the Project Browser. specify 35. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. click . For Contrast. Click Apply. The shadows do not offer much contrast.

NOTE The line style. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. specify 70°. and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. For Altitude. click OK. Select Relative to View. For Azimuth. specify 135°. select Directly. Silhouette Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. for Silhouette style. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. click (Shadows On). was added to this training file for training purposes. select Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Click OK.

rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 2. and click to place the selected view. 3 In the Views dialog. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

5 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Edit toolbar. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 On the Design Bar. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. click (Rotate). select Viewport : Presentation. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. The section needs to be rotated 180°. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . double-click Section 2. Using a clock as a reference. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. The view title no longer displays. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. and press Enter. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. To rotate an object. you click to specify the start radius. In the steps that follow. click Modify.

480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 .Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Modify. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 15 On the Design Bar.

Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 4 In the View Templates dialog. under Sections (Type 1). 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. you can simply apply the presentation view template. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1).Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. click OK. enter Presentation Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation. under Sections (Type 1). 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Presentation Section 2. right-click Copy of Section 1. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

for Rotation on Sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. select Viewport : Presentation. under Sheets (all). 15 Right-click the viewport. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Activate View. select Presentation. lighting fixtures. The furniture. 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click OK. under Graphics. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. annotations. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. double-click A105 . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 18 Right-click the viewport. 12 In the Views dialog. click Add View. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . select 90° Counterclockwise.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. In this exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Type 1). click Callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Callout of Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. as shown. select the callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. double-click Section 1. After you add the callout. and click Rename. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . click Modify. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head.

8 Right-click. and click OK. 7 Select the crop region. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. under Sections (Callout 1). and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. as shown. enter Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. double-click Presentation Callout. 6 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Annotation Crop. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . select Section: Presentation Callout. specify 22. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Activate View.Presentation. double-click A105 . click Add View. 15 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Custom. under Sheets (all). For Scale Value 1. 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. Click OK. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

19 Right-click the callout presentation view. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. and make adjustments as necessary. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click Filled Region. activate the viewport. and move it to the position shown below. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 23 On the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View. under Sections (Callout 1). 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. When finished. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. double-click Presentation Callout.

30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . for Fill Pattern. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. on the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click Finish Sketch. select Solid fill. click Filled Region.Presentation.25 In the Type Properties dialog. When you are finished. double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click Activate View. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. under Sheets (all).

The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 33 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . and sketch the rectangle shown below. 32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the crop region.31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

35 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . and click Deactivate View. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1 : 200.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. under 3D Views. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and apply shadows to the views. double-click Isometric. 5 On the View Control Bar.

select Section Box. Select 1st Flr. A section box displays around the building model. under 3D Views. select Cast Shadows. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . specify 45°. 14 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. Select Ground Plane at Level. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Cnst. specify 135°. 12 In the Rename View dialog. for Silhouette style. in the list. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. click Duplicate. select Directly. and click OK. right-click Isometric 1. under 3D Views. and click OK. Click OK. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. and click OK. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. double-click Isometric 2. specify 35. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 8 In the Name dialog. enter Isometric 1. under 3D Views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. For Contrast. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Rename. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. For Azimuth. under Extents. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric. and click OK. click . For Altitude. 13 In the Project Browser.

When you are finished. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP Notice the rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box. as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar.19 Select the section box.

Presentation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 Select the section box. and click OK. When you are finished. 29 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click Isometric 3. If desired. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. select Viewport : Presentation. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 31 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. enter Isometric 3. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click Rename. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 23 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. and click OK. make a copy of the view. double-click A105 . the stairs and railings may display. On the Annotation Categories tab. The section box no longer displays. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. Next. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. right-click Isometric 2. 25 To hide the section box. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . clear Section Boxes. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. you can adjust the plane location. under Sheets (all).

33 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown.32 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector.

You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . The image below shows the redrawn lines. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 40 Click OK twice. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Concrete. and click Activate View. 39 For Background. This will make it easier to draw lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit. 42 Using the drawing tools. select Transparent. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Design Bar. click Lines. On the Options Bar. for Fill Patterns.

click Region Properties. click Edit/New. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Fill Pattern. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 46 Click OK twice. select Solid fill.43 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 45 In the Type Properties dialog.

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. under Floor Plans. Cnst. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . double-click 1st Flr. you add it to the presentation sheet. The view opens immediately.rvt. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. a cutaway perspective view. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. you create the final view for the analytique. click Camera.

For Sun Position. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Cast Shadows. specify the following: Under Shadow. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For Contrast. click . for Silhouette style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). specify 35. for Name. 6 On the View Control Bar.

Grips display on each plane of the section box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Section Box. A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. and click OK. under Extents.

18 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog.14 Select the crop region. enter 165 mm. double-click A105 . for Width. click Size. and click OK. under Sheets (all). and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). select Viewport : Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 15 On the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). under 3D Views. you must specify the actual size of the image. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 19 To hide the section box. In the Type Selector. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Change. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser.

Annotating the Analytique on page 503. under Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. enter Title. click Edit/New. under Text. click . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . enter Description. click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. specify a text size of 6 mm.rvt. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. double-click it in the Project Browser. 6 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. select a font. and click OK.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. select the same font as the title. click Edit/New. select Text : Title. click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.

18 On the Design Bar.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Text : Description.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you can easily add detail with Revit components. that compose the building. 507 . After you import the SketchUp model. Once the model has been imported. and roofs. such as walls. you create a small building from the front mass form. curtain walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. In this tutorial.

10 In the Name dialog.rte. select All. and click Save. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. right-click in the Design Bar.skp. select SketchUp Files. Double-click the Common folder. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you create a Revit Architecture project. 9 In the informational dialog. visible elements. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. or select from a list. click OK. and not in the library. select Auto-Detect. For Colors. For Files of type. under Template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. for File name. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click the Massing tab. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. click Training Files. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . For Layers.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. enter Import SketchUp. Click the Sketchup file. buildings. click Create Mass. click OK. select Preserve. For Import units. 6 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. enter SketchUp Model.

such as walls. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. Click Open. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 In the warning dialog. click . 14 On the View toolbar. In a new project. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. depending on the complexity of the project. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. click the Close button. ■ ■ For Positioning. curtain walls. select Manual . click Finish Mass. select Level 1.Center. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. and roofs.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Level 1 is the only choice. For Place at level. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan.

510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and roofs. curtain walls. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. verify Level 2 is selected. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. such as walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. for Level. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. verify Basic Roof: Generic .400mm displays. click Roof by Face.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. that compose the building. select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. and on the View Control Bar. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. After you create the building from the mass faces. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.

) to turn off mass visibility in the view. on the View toolbar. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. 9 On the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. 6 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click to display masses. click Create Roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. on the Options Bar. To see the new roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. A roof is created from the mass face.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 .

click Create Roof. 12 On the Design Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

23 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 16 On the View toolbar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. select Core Face: Exterior. click Wall by Face. click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 22 In the Type Selector. for Loc Line. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar.200mm displays. 21 On the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. verify Basic Wall: Generic .

click Curtain System by Face. 28 In the Type Selector. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click to view only the walls and roofs. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below.

Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System.30 On the Options Bar. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 31 Using the same technique.

press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Curtain System. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Create Roof. select the other wall. click Roof by Face. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 38 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar. and select it.35 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

click to view the building that you have created. 42 On the View toolbar.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. specify a point to place the camera. click Camera. under Floor Plans. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. and select the mass face shown below. click Wall by Face. Below the right corner of the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. to view only the walls. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. roofs. as shown. 48 On the View toolbar. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. click your building in the view. Click the frame to display its grips. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . specify a point for the camera target.

and select the left curtain system in the view. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Click OK. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click . select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click Modify. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 50 On the Options Bar. select Center. for Justification.

60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Cancel to end the command. 55 Right-click. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. click Door. under 3D Views. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 56 In the Project Browser.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 63 In the Type Selector. double-click 3D View 1. and move the roof edges as shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

rvt. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Like walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you can change these elements individually. or you can use a specific curtain system command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. you select the grid. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. Like windows. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and mullions. To switch panel types. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and they are not windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. This affects the entire curtain system. grid lines. To change grids. panel. Unlike windows. you need to select a panel. you need to change the length of the wall. click Training Files. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 525 . Flat Curtain System In this lesson. to resize the system.

click Wall. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and double-click Ground Floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector.1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 527 .7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser.

For Top Offset. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. top constraint. top and base attachments. using curtain grids. Click OK. enter 1200. and room bounding. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.11 Select the curtain system. and click (Properties). select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF.

and resize the crop boundary as shown.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser.a. right-click Elevation 1 . click Curtain Grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. 25 On the Design Bar. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Elevation. and click OK. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. under Floor Plans. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and click Rename. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall.

29 In the Select Levels dialog. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. SIXTH FLOOR. click Modify.26 While pressing CTRL. Click to place another grid line. select SECOND FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. FOURTH FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. THIRD FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. one larger than the other. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. FIFTH FLOOR.

Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The two segments are removed. and on the Options Bar. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. click Add or Remove Segments.Next. The segment line style changes to dashed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. and then select the segment above it. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Creating an Entrance | 531 . you set up a doorway on a curtain panel.

click Curtain Grid. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment.38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar.

Use the following image as a guide. 43 Delete the dimensions. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click in any white space to exit the editor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Creating an Entrance | 533 .

50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 On the View Control Bar. 55 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 54 On the Design Bar. 52 On the Type Selector. The panel changes to a double door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. . under Floor Plans. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . not as curtain panels. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors.rfa. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. click Training Files. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. under Elevations. click Modify. on the new curtain system you added. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 56 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the Next. They are part of the curtain panel category. double-click Entrance Elevation. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click view. and click Wireframe.Next. Now. These panels schedule as doors.

The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 63 Click OK twice. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. Creating an Entrance | 535 .60 On the Type Selector. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panels display in blue. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 61 With the panel still selected. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click System Panel : Solid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 65 On the View Control Bar.

This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. select Grid Line Segment. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .68 On the File menu. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Mullion.

Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. select All Empty Segments. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . because their width reduces the size of the doors. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. there are a few that you do not want. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. however. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. so you remove them next. clickModify. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 10 Delete the mullions below them.6 On the Options Bar. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.

Two mullion join controls display. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Finally. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 16 In the Project Browser. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 17 Save the file. you can also right-click. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. double-click Southeast Isometric. 15 On the Design Bar. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 Click the top mullion control. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. click Modify. 13 Click the lower mullion join control.

you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. under Floor Plans. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. for Top Constraint. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Click OK. For Top Offset. click Wall. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add a curtain system using the wall command. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. (Arc passing through three points). The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 4 In the Type Selector. Finally. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 1200.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 7 On the Options Bar.

11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. double-click East. 14 In the Project Browser. you place grids on the system. Divide the halves into quarters. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. and then sixteenths. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. under Elevations. eighths. Next. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid.

16 On the Design Bar. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. 18 In the Type Selector. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. to filter out all 19 Save the file. select Basic Wall: Generic . select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Next. you change some panels in the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .15 Zoom in to the cylinder. click Modify.

enter 100. clear Chain. click Model Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. . and click OK. click . 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 9 Select the extrusion. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for Depth. select Glass. and click . 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and on the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Finish Sketch.rft. 12 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Training Files.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 23 Right-click. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans.14 On the Design Bar. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. right-click. select Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fourth floor panels are selected. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 24 On the View toolbar.rfa family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 21 In the Type Selector. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. click 25 On the View toolbar. and click Change Walls Orientation. (SteeringWheels).rfa. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 In the Project Browser.Pattern. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall.Pattern.Pattern. and return to the project file.

The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. select System Panel . you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. right-click. 30 Save the file. The finished arc wall should look like the following image.Solid. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All the panels change to the solid panel. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. All fifth floor panels are selected.

for Profile Usage.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click East. 8 On the Design Bar. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. enter 8. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click Mullion. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Select Radius. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. and click OK. click Lines. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. For vertical mullions. under Elevations. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. and select it. .rft. click ■ ■ For Sides. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. select Mullion. click Training Files. Click again to specify the ending point.

click Modify. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Visibility. double-click Southeast Isometric.rfa. clear Fine. 20 Select the detail component. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. it can be added as a mullion type. After the new profile is loaded.rfa family. 19 On the Design Bar.detail. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under 3D Views. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 27 In the Project Browser. 31 Click . click Training Files. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. and click OK. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and return to the project file. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion .11 On the Design Bar. and click Visibility. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.rfa. click Detail Component. and click OK. 28 On the View toolbar. clear Coarse and Medium. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.

43 Press DELETE. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. click Modify. under Floor Plans.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 37 Click OK twice. and click OK. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 38 On the Options Bar. You have placed more mullions than you want. for Profile. 40 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . select All Empty Segments. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 41 In the Project Browser. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. right-click. click Duplicate. 44 Save the file. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 36 Under Construction. so you remove the unwanted ones. select Circular Mullion for Family. 33 Click Edit/New.

click Pick Walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. In this lesson. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and press TAB. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. select Defines slope.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. and you can click to select them all. and then apply those custom elements to the system. TIP To chain select all the walls. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. double-click TOP OF ROOF. and a ruled curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar. a storefront system. All the inside faces highlight. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. you learned to create a curved curtain system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 1 In the Project Browser.

This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 16 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 18 Save the file. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 11 On the View Control Bar.7 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. enter 600. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 In the Project Browser. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. Click OK. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. select System Family: Sloped Glazing.

6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.Storefront System In this exercise. click Wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. and enter 2400. 4 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Unconnected for Height.

10 In the Project Browser. Storefront System | 551 . enter 10200 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. even if the wall height changes. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. To see how the grid layout is defined. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 12 Select the storefront wall. For this wall. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. which is specified in the type. and press ENTER. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. under 3D Views. click Edit/New. and click . click Modify. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.

552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Angle. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 1 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. see the Revit Architecture help. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. By setting the Angle value. 16 Click OK. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. center. and Offset. 19 Select a curtain grid. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. select All Empty Segments. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. under 3D Views. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. or end. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. double-click Southeast Isometric. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. Justification. click Mullion. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. enter 15.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 18 On the Options Bar. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. you find Number.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and highlight the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Next. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system.8 Select the highlighted line. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. 9 On the Design Bar. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 10 Select the panel. and click .

17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. Finally. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. right-click. 16 In the Type Selector. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 18 Save the file. and then eighths. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. select System Panel : Solid. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps.

556 .

mansard. including hip. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. gutters. click Training Files. In this exercise. gable. In addition. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you learn to create several different types of roofs. You do not need to create the work plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and low sloped roofs. shed. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this tutorial. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In this lesson. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. you learn how to add fascia. 557 . Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009.Roofs 15 In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Roofs.

The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. centerline. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. and so on). you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. click the blue square on the witness line. 4 Click OK. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. expand Views (all). 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and double-click Level 1.1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. click Ref Plane. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. select Name. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. click Lines. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

19 On the Tools toolbar. expand Sections (Type 1). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. press TAB. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and double-click Section 1. click Modify. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and select the second wall. press CTRL. Next. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall.

click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 26 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click model.

2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. sketch the roof footprint.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans.rvt. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and click Yes. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and double-click Garage Roof. 3 In the Project Browser. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. verify that Defines slope is selected. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

under Dimensions. 15 On the View toolbar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click the model. click Modify. click (Properties). 11 Press CTRL. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and click OK. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. By default. clear Defines slope. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Next. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. select both slope definition lines. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof.

NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 3 On the Options Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and double-click Level 3. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. clear Defines slope. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . When you complete the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. press TAB. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.

click Lines. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. select Defines Slope. click Modify. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 9 Using automatic snaps. 17 When you see the informational dialog. select Defines Slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. click (Rectangle). sketch the chimney opening. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs .6 Click to select all the walls. add new slope lines to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Finish Roof. 15 On the Options bar. Next.

you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. and double-click Level 2. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.18 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang.

click (Trim/Extend). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. select the left vertical slope definition line. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. and click (Pick Lines). using the following illustration for guidance. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. clear Defines Slope.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Next. 10 On the Options Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 7 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Next.

) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. Next. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 .12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 14 Under Constraints.

use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Next. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs .21 Click (SteeringWheels). Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines Slope. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. click (Trim/Extend). 1 In the Project Browser. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.rvt. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. select the left vertical roof line. click Pick Walls. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. Next. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 9 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . enter 0 for Overhang. expand Views (all).

and click OK. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 16 Under Constraints. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a slope-defining line. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. and press ENTER. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 19 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and double-click 3D. Next. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. (SteeringWheels). expand Views (all). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. m_Roofs. click Roof Properties. click Modify. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. click 20 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views.

12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Next. Next. expand Views (all). 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Split Walls and Lines. 5 On the View menu. 3 On the Options Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . click Modify. click Ref Plane. click Slope Arrow. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 9 On the Tools menu. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. To help locate the position of each split. 4 In the Project Browser. add two new slope arrows. and double-click Level 2. click (Pick Lines). 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. clear Defines Slope. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter 600 for Offset. 14 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. expand Floor Plans. you need to add two reference planes. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.

and move the cursor to place the arrow. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 16 Repeat steps 13 . select Slope for Specify. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and then click OK. expand Views (all). When you sketch a hip roof. select both slope arrows. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Modify. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.15 to add the second slope arrow. 18 Press CTRL. When eave heights differ. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and click 19 Under Constraints. 20 Under Dimensions. (Properties). 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. m_Roofs. and double-click Garage Roof. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 1 In the Project Browser. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. the adjacent eave heights must align. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. select a method to align the eaves. and click OK. click Save As. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Align Eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Next. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Dimensions. The eave lines display with a dimension. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 10 On the Options Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). When aligning eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. (Properties). you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. on the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Defines Slope. on the File menu. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 14 If you want to save your changes.

and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). on the Options Bar. click Modify. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. (Properties). 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the roof and. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. and double-click North. click Training Files. under Constraints. expand Elevations.

click Finish Roof. click . and then select Defines slope.6 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click (Pick Lines). expand Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. press TAB. and double-click Level 3. expand Floor Plans. and select the remaining three lines.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. After you add the roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Training Files. click Save As. you add a roof to a building shell.17 On the View toolbar. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.rvt. click mansard roof. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . under Floor Plans. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 4 On the Options Bar.

as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Because the walls are not continuous. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Tools toolbar.Insulation on Metal Deck . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 11 On the Design Bar. for Type. click (Trim/Extend). select Steel Truss . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Roof Properties.EPDM. click Finish Roof. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. double-click Roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. under Floor Plans. The roof has been created. double-click the section head to open the section view. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 16 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . In the next steps. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. click (Draw Split Lines).

582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . move the cursor horizontally to the left. 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select a point on the opposite roof line.

Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click (Modify Sub-Elements). on the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. (Add points). 23 On the Options Bar. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. In this exercise.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next. You modify the points individually.

25 Using the same method. for the dimension. and press ENTER.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. enter -2''. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

including the interior edges of the roof regions. and press ENTER. for Elevation. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 29 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 31 Select the roof slab. enter 4''. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 .27 Press and hold CTRL. and select all of the roof edges. and on the Options Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click (Properties). click Modify.

click Edit. click Edit/New. and save the exercise file with a unique name. for Structure. After you create a roof. gutters. you can easily create its fascia.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 35 Click OK 3 times. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. gutters. and Soffits on page 586. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Fascia. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. The entire slab is sloped. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 36 View the results in the section view. under Construction. for the Thermal/Air Layer. Gutters. Gutters. By making the insulation layer variable. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. 37 If you want to save your changes. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits In this lesson. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save As. and soffits. you learn how to create roof fascia. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. select Variable.

and click Open. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. select M_Fascia-Built-Up.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. and click OK twice. enter Built-up Fascia.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click (Properties). 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . click Training Files. click Duplicate.rfa. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Construction. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 3 Press CTRL. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. 8 In the Name dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and open Common\c_Condominium. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Modify to exit the Fascia command. c_Condominium. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.rvt. click (Properties). click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Creating Gutters on page 588.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar.

and click OK three times. under Construction. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 589 . 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Duplicate. 10 Click to place the gutter. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.3 In the Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. Creating Soffits on page 590. . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK. click Edit/New. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog.

expand Floor Plans. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.rvt. expand Views. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. c_Condominium.

click Join Geometry.4 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. and then select the soffit to join them. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. Creating Soffits | 591 . expand Views (all). 7 On the Tools menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 8 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch.

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

select Square meters. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. under Length. click Project Units. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. your values will be different. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. select mm. and open Common\c_Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the final exercise. Click OK. 3 Under Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. For Unit Suffix.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Training Files. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 593 . select Millimeters. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Finally. If you are using metric units.

These schemes define spatial relationships. expand Views (all). TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. select 2 decimal places. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 9 Click Cancel. select m2. click Settings. click OK. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. it is not necessary in this exercise. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. or 0. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. click the Room Calculations tab. For Unit Suffix. click the Area Schemes tab. Click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. expand Floor Plans. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. and click Room and Area. the system-computed height defaults to the level.

To modify the area. If you select No. under Views (all). Click OK. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 When the informational dialog displays. rather than the area tag. you must select one of the reference lines. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 13 In the Project Browser. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . you must manually add these boundary lines. When you select Yes in this dialog.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. click Area Plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. forming a closed loop. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas.

Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. common areas. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. When you add area boundary lines. click Area Boundary. you can either draw them or pick them. Next. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Click OK. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. and store area. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. If you do not select this option. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. When you pick the walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. click Area Plan. 21 On the Options Bar.

and click to select the area. click Area. click Modify. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Office area for Area Type. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . click ■ ■ . 27 On the Options Bar.23 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.

do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 31 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Area. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click ■ ■ ■ . 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the area.■ Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 29 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type.

and select Store Area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.■ Click OK. 35 Add an area to the building model core. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and Tenant 4 in the lower right. enter Core for Name.

and click to place the legend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Color Scheme Legend. click Save. In the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .rvt. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In this exercise. 37 On the File menu.Notice that within the two store areas. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.

6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. 7 Under Available fields. and click OK. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category.3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. select Areas (Rentable). Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 .

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

At any time. In this tutorial. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. You assign the default wall. If you modify a massing face. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. and roofs. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. floor. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and floors. or both. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. building elements.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After creating mass floors. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you then need to update the building face. floors. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. and perimeter information. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. roofs. 603 . curtain systems. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. After you make building elements. volume.

double-click Level 1. click Create Mass. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. under Views (all). and cutting geometry. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and click Massing. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. sweeps. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog.

click (Default 3D View). for Extrusion End. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. select Mass (Opaque). enter 25000. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 13 On the View toolbar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . 15 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Line). This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for Name. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. enter 1550 mm. 10 In the Materials dialog. for Offset. under Floor Plans. (Pick Lines). click 18 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Constraints. double-click Level 1. click the value for Material. under Views (all). 8 On the Design Bar. and click . and click OK. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and on the Options Bar.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Constraints. double-click West. 30 In the drawing area. enter 27500. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. under Views (all). for Extrusion Start. for Extrusion End. enter 25000. select Pick a plane. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Work Plane dialog.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. and click OK. 23 In the Materials dialog. for Name. under Views (all). 25 On the Design Bar. highlight the larger form. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Mass (Transparent). and click OK. click the value for Material. 26 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. double-click {3D} to see the results. click Finish Sketch. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 21 On the Design Bar. and click . TIP If necessary. press TAB to highlight the entire face.

37 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and clear Chain. and click to select the line start point.31 Click to select the face. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines). and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . Next. click (Draw). click Lines. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.

41 On the Edit toolbar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 39 On the Design Bar. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and delete the vertical construction line. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu.TIP If you do not see this option. on the Options Bar. double-click East. 45 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click the arrow next to the drawing options. under Views (all). (Line). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 46 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click Lines and. click Edit Top.

In the next exercise. In this exercise. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 52 On the Design Bar. for Material. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. click Blend Properties. (Arc passing through three points).48 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 53 On the View toolbar.

and select Chain. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click (Line).rvt. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 9 On the Design Bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options bar. click Lines.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. select the mass. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 1 In the Project Browser. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. m_Massing_Start. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Using the same technique. as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Ref Plane. double-click Level 1. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. under Floor Plans. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 2 In the drawing area. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow.

click Extrusion Properties. click (Default 3D View). enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 13 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion End. 17 On the View toolbar. 14 Under Constraints. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 16 On the Design Bar. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 15 Click OK. Using Swept Blends | 611 . on the View Control Bar. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. In this exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Finish Sketch. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. snap the corners to the intersections.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. enter 0. When sketching each extrusion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.

select a point below the mass elements. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Massing_Start.rvt. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. ■ For the radius. click Sketch 2D Path. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). under Floor Plans. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser.

click (Rectangle). click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. click Profile 1. click Finish Path. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 9 On the Options Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. 10 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. verify that <By Sketch> is selected.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass.

15 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click (Align). and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 17 Using the same method. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Profile 2.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. and press ESC. click Finish Profile.13 On the Tools toolbar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.

click <By Category>. click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click Finish Profile. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). 23 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Swept Blend. under Materials and Finishes. 22 Click OK twice. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. and click .

you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click Finish Mass.24 On the Design Bar.rvt. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file. Finally. In this exercise.

click Training Files. 7 Click New. enter 68000 mm. and click OK. and click Apply. for Height. for Depth. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 11000 mm. for Depth. and click Apply. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 46000mm. and click OK. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. In this exercise.rfa. for Width. enter 12000 mm. and click Apply. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000mm. enter 18000 mm. under Other. enter 6000 mm. 6 For Width. and for Name. enter 18000 mm. 9 Click OK. and for Name. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 3 In the Name dialog. 5 Click New. click New. enter 9000 mm. click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 8 For Width. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and click OK. for Height. 11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa. for Depth. for Height.

rfa family files. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 2 In the Project Browser. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa.rfa.rfa. as shown. 8 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. click Training Files. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 6 Open the Box-Training. 1 If not already selected. under Floor Plans. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. on the View toolbar. and Triangle. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Place Mass.rvt. click Training Files.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Arc Dome. Semi Barrel Vault. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .

23 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Opaque). and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 14 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 11 Select the box. click Modify. select the triangle.10 On the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Place Mass. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 Press CTRL. 25 In the drawing area. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . as shown. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click OK twice. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. 24 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). and click to place the mass. specify Mass (Transparent). select the 3 boxes. 21 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. select Rotate after placement.

and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). specify Mass (Transparent). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Default 3D View). click Place Mass. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click (Element Properties). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. and click OK twice. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. for the Material parameter. for the Material parameter.26 Select the triangle. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. click (Default 3D View). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.rvt file.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. (Join Geometry). click 2 On the Tools toolbar. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . NOTE When you join geometry. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements. In the next exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.

622 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Site. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. on the Edit toolbar. 4 Select the triangle. under Views (all).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click (Mirror). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. as shown. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. (Join Geometry). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. and then select the triangle.8 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). enter SM. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. for Axis. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 17 Press ESC to see the result.

you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.rvt. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. (If Design Options is already selected. do not clear the check mark. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click (Add to Design Option Set).In this exercise.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 2 On the Window menu. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. 1 On the Design Bar. and select the triangle mass element. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. you joined mass elements together. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.

for Angle. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 7 In the Type Selector. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . specify Mass (Transparent). Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser. select Rotate after placement. under Floor Plans. enter 90. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. select Sloped (primary). 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the drawing area. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Curved. 17 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. double-click Site. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Place Mass. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.

specify Mass (Transparent). 26 On the Design Options toolbar. click Modify. and click OK. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the three arc domes. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 20 In the drawing area. and watch the status bar. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 23 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. clear Sloped. double-click {3D}. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. TIP To find the correct shapes. under Views (all). 22 In the Project Browser. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Elevations. click (Add to Design Option Set). under Views (all). While pressing CTRL. and click (Element Properties). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Curved. for the Material parameter. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. double-click North.

you placed mass elements into Design Options. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 32 On the Design Options toolbar. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved and.rvt. In this exercise. 31 Click the value for Design Option. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click the Design Options tab. 34 Close the warning that displays.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 35 On the File menu. and click OK. 33 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click (Design Options). click Make Primary. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can make it the primary option. and click Close. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

5 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Brick on CMU.rvt. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick massing faces to create walls. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). click Training Files. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. click (Pick Faces).Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. double-click {3D}. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and for Loc Line. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. select Basic Wall: Exterior . select Wall Centerline. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.

alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 5. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. 8 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 9 On the Design Bar.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 15 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click Level 1. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces.

double-click Level 9. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 21 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). If desired. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. and Walls. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. When you select levels. volume. select all levels. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Modify. and exterior surface area. click Mass Floors.In this exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 4 Click OK. under Views (all). Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. clear Curtain Panels. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. perimeter. double-click {3D}.

13 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Modify. select Levels 1-4. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click OK.

14 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. select Level 1. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). click Mass Floors. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar.

you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Add. select Floor Area. and click OK. under Available fields. The Floor Area. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Floor Volume. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. Floor Perimeter. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. press and hold SHIFT. select Mass Floor. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. and select Level. 4 Using the same method.In this exercise.

The Mass Floor Schedule displays. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Usage. select Mass: Family and Type. and click OK. for Sort by. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter Retail. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.

expand Schedules/Quantities. under Scheduled fields (in order). 14 Select Level. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 13 With Usage selected.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. and click Remove. After you assign usage. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Edit. and click Properties. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mass: Family and Type. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. under Other. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. for Fields.

select Level. 18 On the Filter tab. and click OK. and plan views. and select Grand totals. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. and click OK. under Other. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. and click Properties. and click Rename. 23 In the Rename View dialog. for Filter. 27 Click OK twice. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. elevation. and in the field below. enter Hotel. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. for Sort by. 16 On the Formatting tab. 22 In the Project Browser. under Fields. for Then by. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. under Other. in the field under Filter by. 24 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. select Usage. select Floor Area. for Field formatting. 19 Click OK twice. select Usage. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. click Edit.

and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create roofs. by level. the floor area. click Roof by Face. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. floor perimeter. The mass floor schedules list. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you created mass floor schedules. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all).In this exercise. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

select Basic Roof : Generic . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 5 On the Options Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof.400mm. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Your model should now look as shown. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.4 In the Type Selector.

you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. and Walls. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing .8 Using the method you just learned. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. select Curtain Panels. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Using the same method. select Sloped Glazing. In this exercise. click Create Roof. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. Curtain Systems. in the Type Selector. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected.

rvt. click Create System. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Press CTRL. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Curtain System by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. verify that Select Multiple is selected.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.9 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 11 Using the same method. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).

you change the size of an existing mass family. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.

7 On the Options Bar. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. enter 30000. and then click OK. Floors. and click (Element Properties). double-click Site. clear Curtain Panels. click Modify. 2 On the View menu. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. clear Exclude Design Options. Roofs. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. under Views (all). Next. and click OK. under Floor Plans. for Width. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls.1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 .

In the next steps. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

click Remake. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Also. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click (Default 3D View).TIP To select the curtain wall. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 Select the roof as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . you want to select the smaller one.

and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

rvt. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Schedules/Quantities. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.20 In the Project Browser. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. 1 Open the 3D view.

7 Clear one of the check boxes. under 3D Views. 9 Select Mass. click All to select all categories. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Rename the view 3D .The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Massing only. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click {3D}. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK.

This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . You might create the model shown. such as columns and an extruded roof. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired.In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components.

652 .

and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you add the new model group to a previously created group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. Creating. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. the host group is also updated automatically. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In another exercise. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and typical office layouts. place. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. You mirror one instance of the group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. hotel rooms. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. When you make changes to a nested group. you also simplify the modification process. you not only simplify their placement. and modify repetitive units. or with those working on a different project. You can also nest groups within other groups.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. In this tutorial. Modifying. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. The new group is considered nested within the host group. 653 . By grouping objects. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In this exercise. For example. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. After you create a model group. all instances in the building model are updated. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects.

and double-click First Floor.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. enter ZR. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 2 Click in the drawing area. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify.

and click Create Instance. expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar. under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 .

15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar.

as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. and one rotated. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . one mirrored. click Modify.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.

all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 661 .Save the training file 22 On the File menu. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. you make changes to an instance of a group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click Save. and click to select it. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. click Save As.rvt.

and click to select the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the wall. and click member to group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .). click Modify.). 8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element.). press TAB. 7 Click (Group Member.3 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.

select Basic Wall : Generic . 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall. 10 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Door. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. Modifying a Group | 663 . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify.127mm. move the cursor to the left. 14 In the Type Selector.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.

Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 In the drawing area. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. move the cursor up. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. click Modify. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping .17 On the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode.

and on the Options Bar. click Modify. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. which acts as the host. enter 1000. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. under Constraints. created in an earlier lesson. click 28 For Base Offset. enter 2134. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and click OK. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. for Unconnected Height. click Finish. Nesting Groups In this exercise. (Element Properties). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 26 Select the opening. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.25 On the Design Bar. 29 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 665 .

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Edit Group. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group). 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. in the Project Browser. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser. Nesting Groups | 667 . and each of the bifold doors. select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. click Finish.

and create an attached detail group containing the tags. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.rvt. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. double-click First Floor. such as text. under Floor Plans.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and filled regions. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. In the next exercise. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you add door tags to a group. such as door and window tags.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click to draw a rectangular region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 9 On the Options Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 12 Enter Tile. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click to add an arc leader. and on the Design Bar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click Text. and select the text note and the filled region. click (Group). as shown. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 14 On the Edit toolbar.

click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. expand Detail. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Groups. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. 22 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Because the detail group contains variables. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. double-click Second Floor.18 On the Design Bar.

4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. as shown.manner that a drawing component can be added. click Modify. clear Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor.

for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click (Group). select Door Tags. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.7 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). click Check None.

Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Modify. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. click Place Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . therefore. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.

10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 12 On the Design Bar. for Create new.rvt. 5 In the New Project dialog.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Create Instance. A warning dialog displays. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). under Groups\Model. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. expand Groups. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. and click Open. verify that Project is selected. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. In this case. and click Save Group. and expand Model. select 2 Bedroom Unit. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. click Desktop. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . browse to the Desktop. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 3 For File name. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. click Modify. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. accept the default template file. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. and click Save. verify that Same as group name is selected. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

expand Revit Links. 18 In the Project Browser. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Remove Link. verify that Attached Details is selected only. and click OK. click Use Existing. click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Training Files. When a group is converted to a link. click Link. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. select the linked Revit model. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 24 In the message dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.rvt. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.

In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually. and then modify the data. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. islands. you add a building pad to the site. convert the data to a table. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. 677 . and walkways. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.

Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 4 On the Options Bar. and double-click Site. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Toposurface. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . and open Metric\m_First_Project. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Point. click Training Files. In the second part of this exercise. and click Site.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. This project file was created using the default metric template. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you create a toposurface using two different methods. expand Views (all). Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Using the first method. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 3 On the Design Bar.

Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Use the following illustration as a reference. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

under Increment. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . Use the following illustration as a reference. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 11 On the Design Bar. 12000mm. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. click Site Settings. enter 1500mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm.8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15000mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. click Finish Surface. 12 On the Settings menu. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. under Additional Contours.

Before importing the contour data. and double-click South. on the Standard toolbar. click the elevation value. under Views (all). (SteeringWheels). and press ENTER. 14 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. modify the level names and elevations. click Modify. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 1000mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . click to view it at various angles. 15 On the View Control Bar. click to delete it.

23 Click the Level 1 text. For Colors. 29 Select the imported topography. Verify that Current view only is not selected. For Layers. under Views (all). click Modify. double-click Site. 24 In the Project Browser. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. rename the level Base Site Elevation. click Pin Position. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . click Yes. it is considered an import symbol. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 28 On the Design Bar. Click Open.21 Click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. select Preserve. under Floor Plans. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. select Specify. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. rename the level Basement. 30 On the Edit menu. Until it is exploded. click Training Files. and click OK.

When you select the import symbol. clear Elevations. click Toposurface. 34 Under Visibility. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then click OK.31 On the Design Bar. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 32 On the View menu. clear C_INDX. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 36 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select it. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. when the edges highlight.

and click Save. Using the second method. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the first method. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 40 On the View toolbar. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. this project file is required in its current state. click Finish Surface. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. click (Default 3D View). 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 42 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. you add property lines using two methods. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. name the project Site-in progress.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Select and delete the right vertical line. Adding Property Lines | 685 . you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Site-in progress. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.rvt. Click Modify. click Property Line. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Lines. select Create property lines by sketching. do so before continuing. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration.

and click OK. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. when they highlight. to delete them. 9 In the warning dialog. 10 In the Property Lines dialog.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. on the Standard toolbar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Finish Sketch. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. select Edit Table. click Property Line. click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. A warning dialog is displayed. click OK. select the lines.

The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 16 Click OK. 19 In the Tags dialog. click to place the property lines. If the gap is not closed. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 15 Starting in Row #1. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. This means there is no gap in the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. Adding Property Lines | 687 .

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 25 Under Visibility. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 On the Options Bar. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site.dwg and click OK. click the Imported Categories tab. In the final step. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear Leader. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Drafting. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Visibility/Graphics. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. The tags display more prominently in this view. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to place it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.20 Click Load. In this exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rfa. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Training Files. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. right-click in the Design Bar. 23 On the View menu. you created two sets of property lines. 30 On the View Control Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.

Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select Dash dot. select Single Value. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click OK. Under Range Type. Under Subcategory. Under Line Color. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. enter 1000.0mm. enter the name Working Contour. 10 Under Additional Contours. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. click New. click Object Styles. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Site-in progress. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 2 On the Settings menu. for Subcategory.rvt. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. select a shade of Brown. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. under Contour Line Display. select Topography. select Working Contour. Under Line Pattern. click Site Settings. In the Object Styles dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and islands. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. such as material.11 Click OK. In this exercise. In the next exercise. The next exercise requires a new training file. parking areas. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. The object style subcategory. you create topographic subregions to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. Working Contour. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you create subregions in order to define roads. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas.

3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . and open Metric\m_Site. Although the exact dimensions are not important. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.rvt. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. click Subregion. try to replicate the location and proportion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Training Files.

Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click OK.NOTE In the Metric training file. 6 In the Materials dialog. click Properties. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click Finish Sketch. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Parking for Name. select Site . and click OK. under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. under Identity Data. click the value for Material.

The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. As you create new subregions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . expand Schedules/Quantities. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. they display within this schedule. double-click Site. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 12 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch.9 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser.Tarmacadam. and double-click Topography Schedule. click Edit Boundary. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . under Floor Plans. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar.

and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. click Lines. In this training project. 20 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. under Schedules/Quantities. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. double-click Site. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Finish Sketch. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. under Floor Plans. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . Within each subregion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 17 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Topography Schedule. Delete overlapping lines. 18 In the Project Browser.

select Site . click Properties. and click OK. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click the value for Material. 29 On the View Control Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. double-click Topography Schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . under Schedules/Quantities. and click to open the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name. click Finish Sketch.23 In the upper-right parking area. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 30 In the Project Browser. enter Island . 26 In the Materials dialog.Grass for Name. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Site . under Floor Plans. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 32 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.walkway. You must sketch each region separately. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 34 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Schedules/Quantities. click Subregion.Grass. 35 On the Design Bar.31 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . double-click Site. click Lines.

If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. there is still only one toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 37 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 .WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 38 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. under Schedules/Quantities. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule.

When you use the grading tool. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. and click Save. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select the toposurface.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . 40 Navigate to your preferred folder.

7 In the Graded Region dialog. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). A warning dialog is displayed. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Using Phasing on page 761.3 On the Options Bar. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Select and Edit. select Existing for Phase Created. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Graded Region. see the tutorial. click Modify. select Copy Internal Points. and click OK.

10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . demolished. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.13 Press DELETE. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Surface. click Point. 17 On the Design Bar.

click to view it at various angles. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 24 On the View menu. only the original toposurface displays. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 23 Select the toposurface. Therefore. under Phasing. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. click View Properties. you create a building pad. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. specify New Construction for Phase. Only the graded topography displays. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. specify Existing for Phase. and delete it. click View Properties. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . (SteeringWheels). and click OK. you can delete it. and click OK. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. When you add a building pad.20 On the View toolbar.

rvt. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE By default. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. Site tutorial-in progress. the Pick Walls command is active. 6 On the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Pad. click Lines. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. If you have an existing building model. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. double-click Site. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

9 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 7 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the new building pad. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. click (SteeringWheels). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding a Building Pad | 705 .TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Adding Site Components on page 706. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.

5 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . click Parking Component. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.Adding Site Components In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Type Selector. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .90 deg.

8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 .NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. click (Default 3D View). 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

click (SteeringWheels). Notice the new parking spaces. 12 In the Type Selector. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. click Site Component. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.9 On the View toolbar. choose any tree type.

Adding Site Components | 709 . 15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. click (SteeringWheels). In the following illustration.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Hidden Line. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Apply. Site tutorial-in progress. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. 5 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710.rvt. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. under Floor Plans.

to position the shoulder of the leader. outside of the site. as shown: 10 Using the same method. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. In the following exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Click again to the left to position the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Click up and to the left.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance.

712 | Chapter 19 Site .■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar.

■ Clear Leader. click Modify. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.

you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. and under Heading. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. click Schedule/Quantities. select Parking for Category. select Mark. double-click Site. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Available fields. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The parking schedule is displayed. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. enter Size. click the Fields tab.rvt. number the first three spaces consecutively.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 In the Site plan. under Space. and under Heading. Site tutorial-in progress. click Close Hidden Windows. select Type. enter Space. and click Add. select Type. If necessary. click Tile. 8 Under Fields. under Views (all). This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 Click the Formatting tab. 7 Under Fields. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Window menu. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mark. 9 On the Window menu. and click OK.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . under Space. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

716 .

You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. To make a workset editable. select the desired workset. use Element Borrowing. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Elements specific to a view. you specify an active workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. they cannot make changes to it.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. In this tutorial. however. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. such as annotations and dimensions. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. go to the Worksets dialog. You can enable Worksharing for any project. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. you must first enable Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. called Worksharing. stairs. Using Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. A workset is a collection of building elements. When you are working on a shared project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. such as walls. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. floors. doors. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. After the project is shared. you can select which worksets are open or closed. and click Editable. and so on. Working in a shared project In a shared project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 .

In a multi-story structure. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. In the lessons and exercises that follow. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. for a typical project. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When setting up Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You should have at least one workset for each person. Instead. In the next exercise. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. and View worksets. not including the Project Standards. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. such as a tenant interior. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets.dialog. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Experience has shown that. In most projects. Shared Levels and Grids.

Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Regardless of the default setting. with each assigned a specific functional task. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . When creating the new worksets. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default.Team member roles Typically. For example. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. designers work in teams. When you create a new workset. On this tab. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. if a workset named Interior was created. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. As new members create worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility.

The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Therefore. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. After saving to the central file. When you save to the central file. you can select which workset is active. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. This makes them available to other team members. This is called “Selective Open. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you make that workset editable by you. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. however. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. the file is saved as the central file. As you work.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you should then save to your local file. proceeds as usual. within the local file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When you save to the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. When you save locally (to your local file). This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. your changes are saved. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Generally. your changes propagate to the entire team. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. However. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. On the Options Bar. When finished or at regular intervals. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.

using VPN. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you work no differently then you would in the office. and then save the local file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. make any required worksets editable. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Alternatively. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. To do this. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. In this instance. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and make that workset editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. save to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. if you know who checked out the required workset. you should check out the Materials workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. In the next exercise. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. In this situation. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. When working remotely. for instance. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise.

A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu.rvt. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. under Show. When you enable worksharing. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 3 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. The Worksets dialog displays. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. and notice all are editable by you. click Training Files. Your username displays as the present owner.

■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Therefore. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. expand Views (all). Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . currently named Workset1. clear Visible by default in all views. 12 Click Rename. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. For training purposes. 13 In the Rename dialog. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click New. ■ 5 Under Show. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. You do. expand Floor Plans. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. In this training file. it is better to make them visible by default. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and Views. In this simple training project. When you initially activate Worksharing. In this case. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". click . 8 Click OK. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 17 On the Options Bar. click OK. you can rename the default workset. For example. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. type the name Exterior Shell. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 9 Click New. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. imagine four users including yourself. select Workset1. under Identity Data. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 16 In the drawing area. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 14 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. however. a small number of team members are working on the building model. and double-click Level 1. Project Standards. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. another is assigned the interior layout. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. clear Families.

click Visibility/Graphics. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 29 Click OK. under Identity Data. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click . 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.19 Click OK. and click OK. stairs. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 26 On the View menu. and walls. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. including the interior doors. 24 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 23 Select all of the interior elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. under Identity Data. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 20 Select one of the interior walls. click the Worksets tab. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK.

If any interior elements remain. 42 On the right side of the dialog. 30 On the View menu. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. click Save As. click Close. double-click Level 2. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click Visibility/Graphics. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 38 In the Save As dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. under Views (all). 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. Now that you have created the central file. you enabled Worksharing on a project. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 35 On the Options Bar. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . click . but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 44 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. and click OK. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. under Identity Data. click Non Editable. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 43 Click OK. 34 In the drawing area. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 39 Click Save. 33 In the Project Browser. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click the Worksets tab. click Worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. In this exercise. and click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. under Floor Plans. 32 Select Interior Layout. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial.

expand Views (all). Before working on the model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. click Open. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Options. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 13 On the Window menu. 6 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog. select Interior Layout for Name. click Save As. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and double-click Level 1. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout. select the central file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 12 Click OK. 7 In the Save As dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. and click Save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and click OK. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. please do so before continuing. In addition. In this case. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. check out worksets. and select Specify. you create your local file. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and select Yes for Editable. Next. make modifications to the building model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. expand Floor Plans. 4 Click Open. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 15 In the Project Browser.

21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. notice the Editable Only option. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. you can still edit this wall. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the File menu. however. In this case.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. Because this element is not owned by another user. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 24 Click OK. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If it was owned by another user. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. and click OK. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. 22 Click OK. click . Verify that it is cleared. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click . Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . If this is selected. 20 Under Constraints. The upper exterior wall should still be selected.

click Door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 26 Delete the door. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.126mm Partition (2-hr). 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 31 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 34 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. The precise location is not important. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In this particular case. In this exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. displays the workset as well as the element type. In addition. At the end of a work session. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. two users access the central file through a network connection. save to central. and reload the latest changes. Throughout the process. Borrowed Elements is selected. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. leave this file open in its current state. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. For training purposes. and save locally immediately afterward. Whenever you save. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. You modified the building model. If you have not yet completed these exercises. a tooltip. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you should relinquish all worksets. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. which matches the information in the Status Bar. it is recommended. each user must check out worksets. By default. you should perform regular saves. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. make elements editable. please do so before continuing. you created your local file. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. add two door openings into the rooms you created. When working in your local file. checked out worksets.

Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Open. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. under Username. 3 On the Settings menu. 12 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Save As. one user has already created a local file. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This file is for your use only. and select Specify. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. You now have a local copy of the project. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and select Yes for Editable. This is a system setting. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. specifically sequenced. select all the User-Created worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. consider that person to be User 1. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 15 On the File menu. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. return to the Settings dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. In addition. and click OK. click Worksets. In the following section of this exercise. 11 On the File menu. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 9 Click Open. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. skip the following section. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. click Options. 7 In the Open dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Options. For training purposes.rvt. select the central file. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. enter User 2.

20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes.You are now the owner of that workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters.” 29 Click OK. expand Views (all). modify the building model. User 1: Check out worksets. expand Floor Plans. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. it becomes the active workset. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. 19 On the File menu. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 24 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. click Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). click Worksets. If it is not open. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 23 Click OK. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 17 Click OK. and select Yes for Editable. open it now. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 27 On the File menu.

Before adding any furniture. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 46 In the Project Browser. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 37 On the File menu. click Worksets. and click Rename.” 39 Click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model.” 35 Click OK. you should create a furniture plan view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. right-click Level 1. under Views (all). 33 On the File menu. and click OK. click Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Reload Latest. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. right-click Copy of Level 1. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and click OK. 44 In the Project Browser. However. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. When you save to central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 41 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser. Click Yes. 34 In the Save to Central dialog.

select Project Standards. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Rename. and click Element Properties. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. 60 In the Rename dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Show. 63 In the Worksets dialog. and click inside any room.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. 62 On the File menu. click Worksets. rather than Families. choose any desk. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click the Worksets tab. 49 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Click OK 2 times. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Save to Central.200mm. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. NOTE System families. 48 In the Type Selector. 66 On the File menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Save to Central. click Visibility/Graphics. click Component.” 55 Click OK. and click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Edit/New. enter Exterior Wall . 50 On the View menu. click Reload Latest. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. such as Wall Types. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. are placed under Project Standards. 65 Click OK. 53 On the File menu. Therefore. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created.

click Options. you save the training file as a central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. throughout this training. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 70 On the File menu. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. There are specific instructions for each user. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises.rvt. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Reload Latest. Each user must have network access to the central file. Checking out worksets. In subsequent steps. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. At the appropriate point in this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. User 1: Reload latest. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. you need to set up your central and local files. select the following. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. 3 In the Save As dialog. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. This exercise requires two users and. finished the previous workset exercises. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and save 69 On the File menu. modified the building model. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Training Files. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Each user checked out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. and these problems are rectified. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. and click OK. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). As each of you work. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. leave this file open in its current state. select Save to Central. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Save As. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to.

select Make this a Central File after save. On the Settings menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Save As. click Save As. and click Save. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 8 In the Save As dialog. 17 On the File menu. return to the Settings dialog. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 5 Click Save. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file. and click OK. and click Save. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Options. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click OK. 13 In the Open dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This is a system setting. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. In addition. 18 In the Save As dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Options. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. Set the Username to User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Options. and reset the Username to your computer login name. This is the local file for User 1. 6 On the File menu. Next. and select Specify. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 12 On the File menu. 15 Click Open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. The central file should still be open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Open. and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1.

select the second window from the top. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and then click OK. click Worksets. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 27 Under Active Workset. 29 On the Options Bar. select them. You are now the owner of that workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select Interior Layout. verify that Editable Only is cleared. Afterwards. select the Interior Layout workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. under Floor Plans. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 30 On the left exterior wall. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click Open. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select Exterior Shell. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and then click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . double-click Level 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and select Yes for Editable. 24 Under Active Workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. After you submit the request. click the File menu. 22 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. and click Editing Requests. At this point. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.

click Close. you requested permission to edit the element. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 38 Click OK. 35 Click Grant. select Save to Central. select the request submitted by User 2. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. and close 39 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . In this multi-user exercise. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. click Check Now. select the following. 36 Click Close. A message informs you that your request has been granted.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. In this case. and notice the window is in the new location. to Local. and the other user granted it. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user.

738 .

you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. and each option set can have multiple schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have multiple sets of design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. The client has asked you to create various options. In addition. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. In this particular case. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. 739 . In this tutorial. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. At any time in the design process. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. After you and the client agree on the final design. Using design options. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.

3 Select Option 1 (primary). Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you set up multiple design option sets. click Training Files. the roof and structure systems must work together. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered.rvt. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. each with multiple design options. click Edit Selected. click New. make your final design decision. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you can edit it. each is constructed for interchangeability. 2 In the Design Options dialog. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. With the second option. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. and delete the unwanted options from the project.In the first exercise in this lesson. and click Close. therefore. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the second exercise. After you create a design option. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you design each of the structural options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. under Option Set. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the only available command is to create a new option set. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP In this exercise.

select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. click Modify. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. or add a dimension string between the columns. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 5 On the View menu. add three columns. By selecting Multiple. TIP To center the middle column. click Column. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns.4 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. select: ■ ■ ■ . The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 9 On the Design Bar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). In this case. click 12 On the Options Bar. In the following illustration. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. expand Views (all). 7 In the Type Selector. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and the third column centered between the two. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only.

A copy of the three selected columns is added. using the same technique. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 17 Zoom out and. Because of the size of the columns. 18 On the View toolbar. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. they are difficult to see in this view.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. click .

under Floor Plans. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Beam. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 23 On the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. The first click specifies the beam start point. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 21 In the Type Selector. In it. click Modify. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. you add the beams that span the columns. Next.

and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and click the center point. 30 On the View toolbar. click . 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 26 On the Options Bar. zoom into the left column. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.

34 In the Design Options dialog. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. under Option. not a new option set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click New. and click OK. enter Beam for New. 40 In the Rename dialog. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. select Option 1 (primary). 38 In the Rename dialog. 36 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. click New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. name the option Louvers. enter Structure for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. click New. enter Roofing for New. click Rename. click Rename. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 33 Click Finish Editing. 45 Under Roofing. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. 46 Under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option Set. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. 43 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. under Option. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog.

double-click ROOF TERRACE. 52 Click Close. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. under Floor Plans. select Edit Selected. you create the second design option. 48 Under Option. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Rename. select Beam. This allows you to more easily manage the project. it will resemble the following illustration. name the option Sunscreen. 53 In the Project Browser. When finished. and click OK.47 Under Roofing. under Structure. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 50 In the Design Options dialog. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Option 2. Under Now Editing. 51 Under Edit. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs.

Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . click Component. 56 In the Type Selector. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. select M_Roof Beam. Refer to the following illustration.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

click Modify. Click to indicate the end point of the move. on the Edit toolbar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The second click represents the move end point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. The first click sets the move start point.60 After aligning the beam. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

click Finish Editing. 70 On the File menu. click . m_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Save As. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 67 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 68 In the Design Options dialog. and click Save. 66 On the View toolbar. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. which is visible by default.rvt. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 69 Click Close. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. name the file.

is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Sunscreen. do so now. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. With the second option. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The first option. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. The second roofing system. If you need to add dimensions. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you design each of the roofing options.rvt. open it now. select Louvers (primary). click Component. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. each with multiple design options to pick from. 2 On the Tools menu. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 5 Click Close. 3 In the Design Options dialog. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 8 In the Type Selector.In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Edit Selected. under Roofing. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. and double-click TOP OF CORE. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 6 In the Project Browser. you set up multiple design option sets. the other for beams. expand Floor Plans. 4 Under Edit. expand Views (all). is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 10 Referring to the following illustration. Under Now Editing. a Louver system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. delete them after the rafter is in place.

and click OK. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 13 On the Options Bar. Enter 5 for Number. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select 2nd for Move To. 15 On the Edit menu. under Other. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click . click Array. click Modify. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 11750 mm for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 16 On the Options Bar.

when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

under Other. click . click Component. 22 On the Design Bar. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Select 2nd for Move To. and select the louver you just placed. click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 23 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 20 In the Type Selector. Enter 34 for Number. Select Constrain. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 25 With the louver still selected. and click Array. enter 5475 mm for Length. click the Edit menu. 27 For the array starting point. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. and click OK. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and press Enter.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. enter 300. 29 On the View toolbar. and. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . when the listening dimension displays.

select Sunscreen. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 39 On the Design Bar. Therefore. click . under Roofing. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. and click OK. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.The louver roof system is complete. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 33 Under Editing. In this case. 30 On the Tools menu. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then click Close. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. and double-click West. Click OK. click Finish Editing. click Lines. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Edit. click Edit Selected. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 34 In the Project Browser. 40 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. expand Elevations. 37 In the Work Plane dialog.

49 On the View toolbar. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Trim/Extend. 48 On the Design Bar. then the center arc. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You will fix this in a later step. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 45 Click OK. and the third point defines the arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc. The first two points define the ends of the line. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. Under Constraints. 41 Select the top of the left column. then you can modify it through the dimension. 46 On the Tools menu. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. click Finish Sketch. the top of the next column on the right. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. click . 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Properties. 43 On the Design Bar. NOTE As you sketch the arcs.

Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Managing Design Options In this exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. tertiary. and delete the discarded design options. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Primary Option. The first option. expand 3D Views. right-click {3D}. Managing Design Options | 757 . right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 51 In the Design Options dialog. After exploring the combinations. The second roofing system. and then click Close. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click Finish Editing. you must create a named 3D view for the primary.The louver roof system is complete. make it part of the building model. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. under Edit. under Views (all). do so now. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Duplicate. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. In this exercise. you designed each of the roofing options. you need this file in its current state. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and click Rename. 52 On the File menu. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. a Louver system. and last options. click Save. you select a design. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 50 On the Tools menu. 2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. Sunscreen. secondary.

11 On the View menu. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Primary Option. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under Views (all).5 Right-click each of the copies.

the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. Managing Design Options | 759 . under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client.14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. double-click Tertiary Option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under Views (all). under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. 18 In the Project Browser. At this point. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. and click OK. 19 On the View menu. under 3D Views. 15 On the View menu. and click OK. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case. click Visibility/Graphics. In your design options. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option.

The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. made it part of the building model. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 29 Select Roofing. under Structure. the current primaries are no longer options. 26 Under Option Set. select Make Primary. 31 In the alert dialog. After exploring the combinations. This was the client choice for structural. 24 Under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Because the client has selected the design option. click Close. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.22 On the Tools menu. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Accept Primary. click Delete. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Yes. The set is deleted. select Beam. click Yes. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 27 In the alert dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. In this exercise. double-click Primary Option. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Save. 23 In the Design Options dialog. you selected a design. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 30 Under Option Set. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . since you no longer need them. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 25 Select Structure. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. and deleted the discarded design options. 35 On the File menu.

demolish existing construction. In the second exercise. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. then add new walls and doors in a different location. This changes room definition and total building model area. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. complete with schedules. In the second exercise. demolish existing walls and doors. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. 761 . For the client. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. and then add new building model elements. In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You create new phases. You create new phases.

If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. and open Common\c_Phasing. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. regardless of phase. When you create a new project. are visible in this view. In the Element Properties dialog. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. This means that all building model elements. expand Views (all). 5 Select any of the exterior walls. If you wish to do so. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. under Phasing. you do not need to change the project units to metric. under Phasing. and double-click Level 1. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. click Training Files. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. click Project Units. go to the Settings menu. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase.rvt. 4 Click Cancel. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. During the demolition and renovation process. expand Floor Plans. As you add new elements to the building model. click (Element Properties).Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 7 Click Cancel. define the units. click Modify.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 . Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 14 On the Design Bar. enter Level 1 . right-click Level 1. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 20 In the Rename dialog.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. After you release the mouse button. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. clear Door Tags. 16 In the Rename dialog. including the door tags. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. for Phase Created. click (Filter Selection). all of the building model elements. 11 In the Filter dialog. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click Rename.Existing. After you create the views. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Because this is a renovation project. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select Existing. right-click Level 1 . and click OK.Existing. 17 Click No. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. Phasing Your Model | 763 . you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 19 In the Project Browser.Existing. and click OK. Because this is a phase-specific view. are highlighted in red. and click OK. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. click .Demo. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. and click OK.

In this case. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. and Temporary.Existing. you modify these settings. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. You may need to zoom in to see this. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Because of this time relationship. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. for Phase. Next. Later in this exercise. under Phasing. and click OK. under New. to which all the building model elements belong. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Under Filter Name. select Existing. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Phase status is time-dependent.Demo. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. new construction occurs after existing construction. under Floor Plans. 29 For Composite Plan. click the Phase Filters tab. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. double-click Level 1 . however. Demolished. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. select Overridden. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. On a logical time line. There are five default phase filters. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 21 In the Project Browser. Existing. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 27 Click New.

Next.Existing. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Phasing dialog. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Color dialog. select Demolished. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. select the interior walls one at a time. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . under Cut ➤ Lines. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Phasing Your Model | 765 . That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host. click the value for Color. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue.31 Under Phase Status. its display changes to a red dashed line. 35 Click OK twice. or you can use the demolish tool. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. 32 In the Demolished row. double-click Level 1 . you demolish all elements hosted by it. you begin demolition. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select red. under Floor Plans.Demo. As you click each wall. click (Demolish). select a lighter blue. select the line style. 42 In the Project Browser. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 36 Using the same method. click OK. There are two ways to demolish an element.

Demo.Existing. and click OK. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. add a long horizontal wall. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and click OK.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). under Phasing. 49 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Door. 47 In the Type Selector. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 50 In the Type Selector. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New. click Wall. 53 Open Level 1 . The demolished walls no longer display. under Phasing. for Phase Filter. 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.New. Phasing Your Model | 767 . which are displayed as red. 59 Open Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed.Demo. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. regardless of phase. 57 In the Project Browser. All elements are displayed in this view.New. 62 If necessary. and existing shows as half-tone. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. 61 On the View Control Bar. The renovated building model plan is displayed. click (Default 3D View). You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. new is shown in blue. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).

define the units. In this exercise. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In this view. click Training Files. All room boundaries are phase-specific. 2 Open Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. As the renovation process continues.rvt. you can see the new walls added to the building model. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and click OK. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. If you wish to do so. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. 63 Close the file.Existing. the rooms change in both definition and size. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. click Project Units. sizes.New. In this view. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. you can do so at this time. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. You can also see that the room quantities. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Notice that this view is the original building model.Demo. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. expand Floor Plans. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. therefore. In the next exercise.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. demolition. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and new construction. 3 Open Level 1 . If you wish to save this file. and double-click Level 1 . go to the Settings menu.

13 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 . Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 On the Design Bar.Existing. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. click Room Tag. In the Phasing dialog. 6 Open Level 1 .Demo. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Room. yet they have different room numbers. and maximize the view. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 5 Click OK. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click in each room as you move to the right.New. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Window menu. In this case. 20 Close the file. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. View phase-specific room schedules. 16 In the Project Browser. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. expand Schedules/Quantities. 18 Open Room Schedule . click Tile. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.New Construction. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. and double-click Room Schedule . The two schedule views tile. 19 On the Window menu.Existing. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. click Close Hidden Windows. In addition. In this exercise.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. In the final lesson. modify their visibility. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and manage the links throughout the project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. You position the building models on the site plan. In these situations. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. performance. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.

you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You link two building models to the project. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and the other is a townhouse. One building model is a condominium.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. modify their visibility. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. You position the building models on the site. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. this system is not exposed to the user. RELATED See the lesson. click Open. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and open Common\c_Site. Click Open. and save the file there. click Training Files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This option is grayed out. and click OK. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. click Open. with write permission. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.■ Auto . Auto . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. 2 On the File menu.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. select the three files. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. you can do so. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. All three files now reside. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. click Close. c_Townhouse. right-click. Manual . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. 5 On the File menu. Select c_Site.rvt. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . click Save As. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Otherwise. however. and click Properties. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. ■ ■ Manual . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. c_Condo_Complex. 8 Clear Read-only. 4 On the File menu. in the Model Linking folder that you created.

select Auto . expand Views (all). Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. click Project Units. and make your changes. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. and double-click Level 1. 11 On the File menu. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the blue detail lines. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you can go to the Settings menu.Origin to Origin.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. For Positioning. 13 Click Open. expand Floor Plans.

17 For the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. click (Move). The first click specifies the move start point. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The second click specifies the move endpoint.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 16 For the move start point. The linked model moves as one object. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The Move command requires two clicks. 15 On the Edit toolbar.rvt displays in the Type Selector.

For Positioning. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. select Auto . 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and select c_Townhouse.Origin to Origin.After you specify the location to move to. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.

click (Rotate). To rotate an object. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In this case.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. you first specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click to specify the rotation start point. 23 On the Edit toolbar. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. and then click to specify the end of the rotation.

778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy). 30 For the starting point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The Copy command works much like the Move command. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.

37 On the View toolbar. 32 On the Edit menu. click (Default 3D View). NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click .A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. under Identity data. for Name. enter Townhouse A. and click OK. click Rotate. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. use the Move command to make any adjustments.

Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. After linking the files. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you need this project file open and in this view. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. do so before continuing. click (SteeringWheels). 2 On the SteeringWheels. If you have not completed the previous exercise. When you originally linked the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.38 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click and hold Orbit. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . click Save. In the next exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. they were placed too low within the site topography.

Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. when it highlights. expand Elevations. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. and double-click South. In the steps that follow. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. To do this. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. When using the Align command. 3 In the Project Browser. In this case. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. and click to select the line. under Views (all). and then select the plane that you want to align. and click to select it. Click the Revit Links tab.rvt. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. click (Align). Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. you first select the plane you want to align to. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View toolbar. double-click North. This would over-constrain the model. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. under Elevations. 15 On the File menu. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click Save. click and hold Orbit.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click (Default 3D View). 11 Return to the South elevation view. click 13 On the View toolbar. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 14 On the SteeringWheels. (SteeringWheels).

rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. detail level. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. and the halftone settings for each linked project. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. expand c_Townhouse. you need this project file open and in this view. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. 2 On the View menu. When you link a file. click the Revit Links tab. By linked view. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.rvt. or Custom. double-click South. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 9 Under Visibility. click Custom. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. select <Custom>. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. display settings. As you can see. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click By Host View. under Elevations. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. scroll down and clear Levels. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. you can independently control the visibility settings. If the Basics page is set to Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 10 Click OK. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. do so before continuing. 4 Under Visibility. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click Visibility/Graphics. click OK. 8 For Annotation Categories. In the next exercise. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only.

click the Revit Links tab. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. no detail level changes are required. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. click By Host View. on the Basics tab. select Custom. 23 In the Model categories list. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. and click OK. With linked files. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. click the Revit Links tab. 14 On the View menu. You can click the value for Detail Level. select <Custom>.rvt. 20 For c_Townhouse. under Display Settings. 24 Click OK. In this case. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. double-click Level 1. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. or fine. under Floor Plans. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By selecting custom under Model Categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. and then set the detail level to coarse. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. expand c_Townhouse. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. 16 Under Visibility. medium. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. By default.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Using the Custom option.rvt. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 22 Click the Model Categories tab.

28 Select By linked view for View range. this is preferable. click Custom for the Townhouse link. In most cases. under Visibility. on a sloped site for instance. click Save. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. there are situations.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. demolished. In this case. However. In this exercise. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . existing. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. click OK. With the Show All filter applied. you manage the linked files. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you need this project file open and in this view. and phase filter of a specific link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. All other components are grayed out. 31 On the File menu. all new. In the next exercise. phase. In this case. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. select c_Townhouse.rvt. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. 25 On the Revit Links tab. 29 Click OK. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. By default. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 Under Display Settings.

Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. 3 Under Path Type. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. do so before continuing. The default path type is Relative. 6 At the confirmation prompt. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . click Manage Links. 7 Click OK. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. click the Revit tab. the link is maintained. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. They supply information regarding the links. In general. Notice the Loaded. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Locations Not Saved. select c_Condo_Complex. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. and Saved Path fields are read only. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. If you have not completed the previous exercise.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click Yes. 4 Under Linked File. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.rvt. In a shared coordinate environment. As links are moved to new locations in the host project.

you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. In general. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. If you choose not to open that workset. 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.rvt. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. expand Revit Links. When you initially place the link. click the arrow next to the Open button. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. and select Specify. 8 In the Project Browser. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. However. To do this. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. right-click c_Condo_Complex. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. and click Reload. In these cases. the link is not loaded. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save As. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.

In the next lesson. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). In essence. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. name the file Site_Project. and save it as an RVT file. When you share coordinates between projects. do so before continuing. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . leave the project file open in its current view. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In this exercise. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you are establishing a shared origin point. and the resulting project files. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. When used in conjunction with model linking. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. If you have not completed the previous lesson.10 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. The host file consists primarily of site components. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project.

When you are working in the host project. In this case. click Open. As indicated in the Status Bar. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. 3 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. open it before continuing. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.coordinates are used. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the lesson. Linking Building Models on page 772. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .rvt and click Open. Select Site_Project. 2 On the Tools menu. If you have closed the project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. do so before continuing. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. click the Condo Complex. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. and the resulting project files.

select Location 1. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. 5 On the Design Bar. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. On the Status Bar. and click OK. and Lot C. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. you need this project file open and in this view. click to select it. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. it is placed at a specific location. If you have not completed the exercise. but can have multiple additional locations. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Lot B. even though both models originate from one linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. this location is not saved outside of the host project. In this exercise. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. However. do so before continuing. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. when the edges highlight. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. These three locations can be named Lot A.

This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. When constraining a link to a location. 7 In the Rename dialog. click Change. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. . click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models.2 On the Options Bar. click . 9 In the Select Location dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. click Rename. This is a one-time operation. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . enter Lot A for New. click Not Shared for Shared Location. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. select Move instance to. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 4 Under Value. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. under Instance Parameters. Record the current position as a location. In the Choose Location dialog. click Reconcile. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. under Instance Parameters. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

26 Click OK. the active location position is moved. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. When you release the mouse button. and click OK. you cannot redefine its location. and click OK. click the Revit tab. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. ignore the warning. or cancel the action. select Save. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Because Lot A is currently in use. Record current position as. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. click Manage Links. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. and then select the townhouse project. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 19 In the Select Location dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project. enter Lot B for Name. select the second option. Notice the OK button is still not active. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. 30 On the Tools menu. When you create a location. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click Duplicate. make sure Lot B is selected. a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. 23 Click Save Locations. and click OK. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. This is a two-click process. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. and the left townhouse resides at that location. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . By relocating a project. click OK. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location. click OK. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files.Notice the OK button is not active. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 16 Click Change. You created the Lot A location in previous steps.

click Close. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 36 On the File menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. select Save. and click OK. you work in one of the linked projects. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. NOTE In the following exercise. click Save. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 34 On the File menu. 33 On the Edit menu. In this exercise.

2 On the File menu. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Select c_Condo_Complex. click Open. In this exercise. Click Open. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model.By Shared Coordinates. double-click 1st Floor. select Auto . do so before continuing. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. under Floor Plans. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the exercises. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.rvt file. Also. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. The current active location is Lot A. if other models were linked into the same host. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.rvt file. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Because this building model only has one named location. it is placed automatically within the host project. In addition. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . For Positioning. When opening the linked file.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.

6 Select Lot B. and click Make Current. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. click Duplicate. click Manage Place and Locations. you can select Lot C if necessary. click Manage Place and Locations. In this exercise. In this exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. In the next exercise. and click OK. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. click View Properties. If you have not completed the exercises. 7 Click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. orient a view to true north. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. In the host file. enter Lot C. do so before continuing. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. select True North for Orientation. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. you create a new location. you manage the shared locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Graphics. you need this project file open and in this view. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 3 In the Name dialog.

click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Close. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. click Open. Select Site_Project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt and click Open. If you have not completed the exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. In this exercise. On the Options Bar. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. 10 On the File menu. You can save the file if you wish.

3 In the New Schedule dialog.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Count. click the Fields tab. and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. select Doors. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click OK.

8 Click OK. 13 On the File menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Close. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. clear Itemize every instance. right-click Door Schedule. 14 On the File menu. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . 12 Select Grand totals. and click Properties. and then click OK twice. under Other. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. click Save. In this exercise. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. select Family and Type for Sort by. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. selection default options. click Training Files. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Invert background color.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click the Graphics tab. In the first lesson. 10 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. Notice that the drawing area is black. notification preferences. under Template file. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Finally. 11 Under Colors. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment.rte. 4 Under Colors. 6 In the New Project dialog. which is independent of the project settings. journal cleanup options. click OK. and click OK. click the value for Selection color. These settings control the graphics. click Browse. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. and set it as your default template. 8 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click the Graphics tab. 3 In the Options dialog. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. In the second lesson. and your username when using worksets. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you modify the system environment. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 803 . Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you create an office template.

click Modify. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. the elements causing the error display using this color. click Wall. and open Metric\m_Settings. 26 In the Options dialog. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Selection color. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click Training Files. For Tooltip assistance. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. select None. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open.12 In the Color dialog. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Under Notifications. select One hour. select yellow. 15 Click OK. 13 Click the General tab. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click No. and select the wall. click Modify. clear Invert background color. 18 On the Design Bar. When an error occurs. However. click the Graphics tab. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. 22 When prompted to save changes. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.rvt. select red.

Under Journal File Cleanup. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Specifying File Locations on page 805. and click Open. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. notice the list of library names. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . However. 8 Click Cancel. family template files. For Tooltip assistance. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. If prompted. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. do not save the changes. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. including your default project template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click Browse. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. you can start a new project with that template. 5 Under Default path for user files. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and family libraries. select Normal. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 10 In the Places dialog. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. This path is set automatically during the installation process. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 7 In the Options dialog. These files are used in the software support process. Under Username. click Browse. centralized. such as in a large. and click Browse to select a template. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Your login name displays by default. click the File Locations tab. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.27 Click the General tab. 3 Under Default template file. click Places. click Browse. TIP To view a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. 4 Click Cancel. you specify default file locations. select your preferred Save reminder interval. under Default path for family template files.

806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or loading a Revit Architecture file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. under Libraries. Save. or families. and change the name to My Library. In the following illustration. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and Import dialogs.library names and path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click Open. and select it as the library path. and you can create new libraries. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and click the icon side of the field. saving. Load. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. When you are opening. 11 In the Places dialog.

Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. and decal image files. 23 Select My Library. 21 Click the File Locations tab. If you work in a large office. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 5 In the text editor.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Load. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you want to relocate this path. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and click OK twice. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. specify the new location here. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Import dialogs. 28 Click OK. 15 Under Library Name. such as bump maps. 3 Under Settings. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. 9 In the text editor. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. view the current path. 22 Click Places. Save. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click Edit. click My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. This path is determined during installation. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. (Remove Value) to delete the library. click the My Library icon. 19 Click Cancel. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 24 Click 25 Click OK.

19 Under Settings. click the Spelling tab.11 In the Options dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. under Template file. click OK. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 In the text editor. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click File menu ➤ Save. delete sheetmtl-CU. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 In the Options dialog. click Text. click Restore Defaults. 2 In the New Project dialog. click OK. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Edit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. As you zoom in and out within a view. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 22 In the text editor. 18 In the Options dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Modify. 14 Click in the drawing area. 12 On the Standard toolbar. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Browse. In this exercise. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click default template. you modify snap increments.rte. do not save the changes. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you modify snap settings. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If prompted.

enter SM. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and enter 500 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you do not have a wheel button.6 Under Dimension Snaps. click Wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click OK. such as ZO to zoom out. TIP To zoom while sketching. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. While sketching. clear Chain. zoom out until it does so. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and move the cursor to the right. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . 7 Under Object Snaps. For example.

and specify the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. This is the increment that you added previously. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active. and do not save the file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and delete the value 500 . Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 24 Click OK. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 21 Move the cursor downward. and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and click Wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and the wall edges. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. the midpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 18 Enter SM. Do not set the wall end point. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.

Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. lines. you render a region to observe the changes. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Modifying Project Settings | 811 .Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Using these options. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. fill patterns. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and object styles. When you apply a material to an element. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Settings. click Training Files. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Finally. In the steps that follow.rvt. You create and modify materials. annotations. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. save the project file with a unique name.

6 Click Replace. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. When a model element is loaded into a project.Stone. These details will display in rendered images. 10 Click the Graphics tab. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. The properties describe the color. 11 Click OK. and texture of the material. 9 Click Apply.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. However. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. select Stone.Fieldstone material. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. and select Masonry . Masonry . and click (Element Properties). this material provides a starting point for the new material. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.Fieldstone. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. In the steps that follow. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. read-only library for render appearances. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. In the Materials dialog. 3 Click (Duplicate). This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. enter Masonry . It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. In the next exercise. and click OK. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab.Fieldstone. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. scale. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. When you change properties of a render appearance. and click OK. for Class.

24 In the Type Selector. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 17 For Structure. 18 For Finish 1. 25 On the View toolbar. . 16 Enter the new wall name. 20 In the Materials dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Fieldstone. 22 Select the left exterior wall.Brick. select the rear exterior wall. click in the Material field. click Edit/New. click This is the material that you created. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click (Default 3D View). Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. select Masonry .Fieldstone. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . click Model Graphics Style.14 In the Element Properties dialog. Fieldstone on CMU. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK. 15 Click Duplicate. click Edit. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 23 While pressing CTRL. 21 Click OK three times.

and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. select Low or Medium. When finished.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 31 In the Rendering dialog. select the render region (a red rectangle). 28 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. The rendering process begins. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. select Region. for Setting. under Quality. 29 In the 3D view. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. and click Rendering. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 32 In the Rendering dialog. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. click Rendering Dialog. In the following exercise. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. click Render. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material.

click Import. 33 In the Rendering dialog. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. in the Rendering dialog.rvt. Zoom into the model. such as steel. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . click Show the model. 3 Under Pattern Type. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and clear Region. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click West. choose Model. 5 Click New. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. expand Elevations.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 7 Under Custom. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Custom.rvt. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Then click Render again. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Show the model. m_Settings-in progress. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. select fldstn. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. (Element Properties). 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog.56. and click OK. enter Fieldstone. select Model. click 15 For Structure. click OK. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. click Training Files. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.Fieldstone. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Fieldstone material. click Edit. 21 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 22 Click OK three times. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. under Pattern Type. enter .8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 9 Under Custom. In the Materials dialog. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. click in the Material field. and for Import scale. 10 For Name. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 11 Click OK. click to select a fill pattern. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. for Finish 1. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .pat. click Edit/New.

Controlling Object Styles on page 817. For example. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. expand 3D Views. m_Settings-in progress. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and double-click 3 Windows.25 On the View toolbar. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. TIP If the pattern does not display. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. you can set the window frame material to By Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. there are often multiple window types within a project. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the keyboard. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Controlling Object Styles | 817 .rvt. click (Default 3D View). and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. adjust your zoom settings as needed.

11 On the Options Bar. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. click Modify. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. click in the Value column. click Edit/New. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Edit/New. for Trim Exterior Material. 5 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Materials dialog. click (Element Properties). for Trim Exterior Material. under Materials and Finishes. click By Category. . Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 10 Select the arched window. click (Element Properties). and click 15 Click OK twice. under Materials and Finishes.

click in the Material column. select Trim. 18 On the Model Objects tab. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. type red. and click OK.red paint. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. and select Trim. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . and click OK. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. or keywords include the word red. 25 In the search field. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. for Name. 19 For Trim. . and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. click OK. enter Trim . select Use Render Appearance for Shading. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. descriptions. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. When you render a 3D view. expand Windows. 23 Click Replace. (Duplicate). select Paint. for Class. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 28 Under Shading. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 29 In the Materials dialog. click OK. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges.

Use object styles to apply the change to all views.rvt. select Red. select Roofs. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. (Default 3D view). 7 On the View Control Bar. select Roof Line. under Category. 11 For Line Pattern. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. is open with the 3D view active. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 In the Object Styles dialog. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. Now that you have created a line pattern. click New. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. m_Settings-in progress. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Roof Line. 10 For Line Color. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.31 On the View toolbar. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name.

but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click to Building. 14 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the line color displays in this view. The line style is applied to the roof in the view.12 Click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 .

21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. under Category. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. for Visibility. under Floor Plans. sections. For Pattern. select Roofs. 19 For Line Pattern. For Color. select Roofs. click Override. 18 For Line Color. select Black. select Roof Line. elevations. double-click 03 Roof. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Blue. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. select Solid. Plans. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Click OK.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 15 In the Project Browser. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select 5. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines.

under Modify Subcategories. 29 For Name. select Red. select Zoning Setback. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click OK. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. 34 On the Options Bar. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. under Floor Plans. This places the line above the topography. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. For Line Color. 33 In the Type Selector. select Double dash. click New. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . click Lines. Notice the site topography and the property lines. double-click Site. specify the following: ■ For Plane. Click Click (Draw). (Line). For Line Pattern. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser.25 Click OK twice. enter Zoning Setback. select 2. select Level: 02 Entry Level. and click OK. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.

43 Click OK. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. (Default 3D View).NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. select it. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. Expand Site. click (Default 3D View). 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and clear Zoning Setback. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations on page 825. double-click 02 Entry Level. 38 On the Model Categories tab. and then clear Property Lines. expand Lines. 39 Click OK. 44 On the View toolbar. 36 On the View toolbar. NOTE If Site is not selected. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Property Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view.

you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 02 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. m_Settings-in progress. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 9 In the Type Selector. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Linear . 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. click Modify. For Units. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Under Text. 7 Click OK twice. click one wall. m_Settings-in progress. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number.Imperial and click OK. Modifying Annotations | 825 . You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. for Units Format. To place a dimension. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click Dimension. You have created a new dimension style. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click outside the second wall.rvt. select Feet and fractional inches. 4 Enter the name Linear . and place a dimension on the floor plan.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Duplicate. click the default value.Imperial. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. (Undo). click another wall.

This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number is now the assigned tag. 18 In the Tags dialog.14 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click Cancel. click Training Files. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click M_Window Tag . click Tag All Not Tagged. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the west wall. Leave M_Window Tag .Number as the assigned tag. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. notice that the label displays 1i. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . under Category. 26 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the preview image. 19 Click Load. Then press Delete. 24 While pressing CTRL. 23 Click OK. 21 In the Tags dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. scroll down to Windows. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.Number. 22 Under Loaded Tags. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. select the 3 window tags. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click (Element Properties).Number. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. clear Leader.rfa. click the bottom window. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select 0 decimal places. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and click OK. dimensions use these project settings. Click OK. and click OK. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 2 In the Project Units dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Unless overridden.Number. 31 On the Design Bar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Temporary Dimensions. In the final section. Unless overridden. For Unit symbol. verify that Create is clear. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. 32 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). click the default value. In the second section. for Length. for Area. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. and Detail Level Options | 827 . In the first section. select Faces. m_Settings-in progress. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.Temporary Dimensions. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. select To the nearest 100. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. you modify the detail level assignments. select Openings.rvt. select meters squared.Under Category. click Modify. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Rounding. 8 Under Walls. 6 Click OK. Temporary Dimensions. the other displays the instance value. dimension values display using this setting. notice Window Tags appears twice. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. you specify the project units of measurements. Specifying Units of Measurement. M_Window Tag . click the default value. 3 In the Format dialog. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 9 Under Doors and Windows. you modify the temporary dimension settings.

You do not select a view scale to move it. expand Floor Plans. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and expand 3D Views.In this project. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. In this exercise. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. In this table. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click . you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 12 Click OK. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. expand Views (all).

In the Project Browser. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand Sheets (all). Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. notice that views are grouped by phase. 5 On the Views tab. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. In the Project Browser. select Discipline. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand each view type. 8 Select Phase.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. and click OK. select Type/Discipline. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 6 In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. and click Apply.

Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK. click the Folders tab. 14 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set. and click OK. 16 Click the Views tab. under Sheets. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. and click New. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline.

click Browse. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. In the lesson that follows. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can choose from several templates. and open Metric\Templates. and click OK. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. Creating an Office Template on page 831. For example. When you create new projects. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. expand Complete. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Creating an Office Template | 831 . You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. when you create a new project.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. If you want to save this file. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you select the starting point for your office template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. and Discipline. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. levels. click Training Files. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In that case. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. expand 3D Views. Proceed to the next lesson. In this lesson. enter a unique file name. dimensions styles. the same rules apply. Whenever you create a new project or template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. 2 Under Template file. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You can also save these settings in a template file. navigate to your preferred directory. and view names. and expand both Architectural and Structural. 21 In the Project Browser. under Views. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. When you create a new template based on an existing template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. you create an office template. View Type (Family and Type). and click Open.rte template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

15 Under Create new. When you create the material. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 14 Click Open. for Create new. in the drawing area. For example. you can select it now. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. weights. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Project. 6 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. select Project template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 9 In the Project Browser. and double-click North. In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. If you have additional projects open. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. drag a zoom region around the level heads. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 13 Select the default template.5 In the New Project dialog. 12 Under Template File. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. close them. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the project settings for your new template. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. If you want to use a template other than the default. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects.

During this exercise. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. 13 If necessary. line patterns. annotation objects. 9 Click OK when finished. transparency. and imported objects. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. specific modifications are not dictated. line colors. see a preview of the rendered material. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. you can set line weights. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. In the Object Styles dialog. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. and scroll through the list of categories. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . For more information. TIP For more information about creating new materials. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. You can align. rotate. If you change render appearance properties. or refer to the online help. including color. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and move model patterns. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. Observe the materials that are already defined. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. For more details on modifying these settings. 4 Click Replace. You do this by defining the render appearance. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. and change render appearance properties. When you create or modify a material. the changes are saved as part of the project template. or modify existing patterns. create new subcategories. and materials for model objects. 2 Scroll down the materials list. or refer to the online help. create and modify them as needed. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. texture. and similar attributes. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. see the previous lesson. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Modifying System Settings on page 803.

The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. click Duplicate. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 20 Click OK. create new line subcategories. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. name the style. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it from this list. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab.15 Modify categories. tags. You can add and delete view scales. and dimensions. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 29 Click OK. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 32 To modify a line pattern. and create new subcategories as needed. and click Edit. 34 Click OK. such as section lines and dimension lines. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. modify the line weight. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 18 For existing line categories. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . To see the details of a particular style. select it. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 19 If necessary. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. and specify the properties. or line pattern as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. line color. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads.

and click OK. 62 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 50 To load new annotation tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. TIP In the drawing area. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Linear. and choose a decimal symbol. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. name the style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 53 For Length. 60 Under Walls. Volume. and Angle settings. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. In the Tags dialog. 57 Specify the Slope option. 55 Click OK. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. and specify the properties. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. To see the details of a particular style. click Format. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Duplicate. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. angular.40 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. click Load. 46 Click OK. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. select it from this list. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. For example. 58 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 .

Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. The detail level is based on view scale. click the arrows between columns. 73 Click OK. and move view scales as needed. To move the view scales. 68 Delete. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. create new browser organization types. 65 Click OK. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. For example.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can save phases or named print settings in a template. See Setting up If necessary. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. rename. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. When you create a new view. 64 Review the table. rename. click the Views tab. or edit existing organization types. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. or edit existing organization types. However. 70 Click the Sheets tab. In a typical project. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or Fine. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 69 If necessary. Each command is available on the Settings menu. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Using the arrows between the columns. 72 If necessary. create new browser organization types. Use the table below as a checklist. You can find additional information in Help. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Medium. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 71 Delete. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. In such a case. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Although these settings can be saved within a template.

and electrical fixtures. Depending on the intended use of this template. In the steps that follow. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Door. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. you can set the default contour line interval. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you could load detail components. or electrical fixtures. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Although the options are endless. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you can move onto the next component type. phase filters. For example. For example. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you can set up the phases. do so before starting this exercise. furniture. or add to this selection. You can load any family or group into a template. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. notice the list of doors already loaded. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you may want to delete. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. if you load every available window type. you do both. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. If this selection is satisfactory. If necessary. or use the Project Browser. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . title blocks.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Although this is possible. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. there are some important thoughts to consider. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. the section cut material. In addition. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. 2 In the Type Selector. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and the poche depth. modify. However.

and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. and click OK. Make modifications. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Modify type properties. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. create. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click Load. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. expand Families. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. or modify a door. and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. In the Element Properties dialog. create.3 To modify. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Select it. click Edit/New. Enter a name. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Bar. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Notice that each family category is listed. or load a new door type. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load.

In addition. create. This title block is currently part of the template. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you created new projects using different templates. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. and select the title block type. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view.) 10 Expand the title block. In addition. click Load. Discipline. right-click the component. you create the views required for your template. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. View Range. Detail Level. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 11 On the Options Bar. and click Delete. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. click 12 Click Preview. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. load. (Element Properties). and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. To do so. To load a title block. 13 Click OK. In this exercise.

At any time. and apply the appropriate template. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. In this exercise.settings of categories and subcategories. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. double-click South. 2 Under Names. Every time a new plan view is created. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Apply. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. select Site Plan. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 15 In the Project Browser. In addition. and click OK. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. you can apply a view template to any view. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. double-click Level 2. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. and double-click Level 1. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and click OK. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . open the view from the Project Browser. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. under Elevations. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. click Apply. the view is not linked to the template in any way. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. and then click OK. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. select Architectural Plan. under Floor Plans. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. double-click Site. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 4 If necessary. 12 In the Project Browser. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Apply. under Floor Plans. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. you will first modify view templates. After applying the template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 18 If you modified any other view templates.

in the Project Browser. 31 Rename the 3D View. and. To orient the 3D view to another view. right-click the ViewCube. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Rename. If you want to modify view properties. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. on the View toolbar. Blue level heads have associated plan views. click Schedule/Quantities. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. To orient the 3D view to a direction. click 29 In the Project Browser. If it does not display. review the floor plans. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. click Orient to View. and click Save View. notice that you have the option to rename. duplicate. and select the desired view. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. Black level heads have no associated views. review the existing floor plans. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 To add more levels to the template. By default. or an edge of the ViewCube. or delete them as needed. right-click the ViewCube. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. If prompted. 30 In the Project Browser. ceiling plans. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . (Default 3D View). The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. expand 3D Views. and click Properties. in the shortcut menu. duplicate. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and elevations. select Make Plan View. 27 Create additional levels as needed. under Floor Plans. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. under Floor Plans. click Level.Notice the level names. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Orient to a Direction. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. enter a view name. a face. right-click the view name. right-click Level 1. or delete this view. and select the desired direction. use the ViewCube.

You can add schedules to a template. in the Project Browser. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. select the default title block. 40 To add views to the sheet. 37 Click OK. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Select a view. and click OK.txt for MicroStation). To do so. assign filters. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. Right-click the sheet name. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click OK. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 42 Create new sheets as needed. On the Formatting tab. You can still add views to the sheet. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. select one. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet.txt for AutoCAD. on the View tab of the Design Bar. select and order required fields. click Add View. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. On the Appearance tab. select the title block and delete it. select the category type. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. To later add a title block to a sheet. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. and click Rename. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. modify settings as needed. click Sheet. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click Add View to Sheet. modify settings as needed. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. On the Filter tab. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. modify settings as needed. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. or exportlayersdgn. and modify their properties accordingly. You are prompted to select a title block. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. After the sheet is created.

you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. When scheduling. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are retained within the project template. and related multi-category tags and schedules. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. and so on. and so on. and click Save. project parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Using shared parameters. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. for example. name the file. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. therefore. 5 For each category. doors. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. 2 For each category. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. select Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule. name the file. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. click Save As. 8 In the dialog. windows. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can save these mappings to a text file. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Click Save As. For example. and click Save.

Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 11 For each parameter group. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For each parameter group. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. project parameters. under Groups. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click Add. for Name. and click OK. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. add required parameters. 2 Click Create. select a group to add parameters to. 8 Under Parameters. select a parameter discipline type. and choose a shared parameter. 3 Name and save the file. 25 Click Select. 22 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. and specify its discipline and type. 26 Click OK. select a parameter value type. click Add.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 5 Enter the group name. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 24 To add a shared project parameter. click New. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. you may want to save the file to a network location. 9 Name the parameter. 21 Under Categories. 17 Under Discipline. 23 Add project parameters as needed. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. because each office has a unique set of needs. 16 Under Parameter Data. If a file already exists. select Project parameter. click New. 10 Click OK. 19 Under Group parameter under. enter a parameter name. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. you can create a list of parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters.

4 Modify the printer settings. you create named print settings. 5 Click Save As. 35 For Name. paper placement. 28 Click OK. you can set options such as sheet sizes. enter a name for the schedule. In this exercise. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. click Setup. 32 Navigate to the directory. By going first to the Print command. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. For each printer. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 34 For Category.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. For information on creating multi-category tags. 37 When you have completed the schedule. click OK. select Multi-Category. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. or refer to the online help. and the percent of actual size. and print. and click Open. you need only select a setting. for Name. 3 Under Settings. you can load them into the template. and make it your default template file. 6 In the New dialog. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and click OK. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. By creating named settings within the template. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. make minor modifications if necessary. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 2 Under Printer. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Click OK. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. save the file as a template. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. The tag is now part of the template. select the tag.

If you have a project. Create additional settings as needed. you modified settings. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. loaded components. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 24 Navigate to the template location. and click Open. Your template is complete. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 15 Name the template. 9 In the Print dialog. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 11 Click Close when finished. This can provide a good starting point for a template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. If you need to share this file with others. and create new settings for this printer.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. and saved them to a template. select it. and click OK. 22 Click the File Locations tab.rte). you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 14 Under Save as type. and click Open. select a different printer. and click Save. In addition. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. save it in a network location. click Save as. In this lesson. select Template Files (*. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Browse. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Click OK. The only remaining task is to save it. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 25 Click OK. enter a new name for the printer. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 19 Select the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. 23 For Default template file. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. In addition. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 18 Click Browse. modify the printer settings. click Setup.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful